Sie sind auf Seite 1von 3383

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management

System
V200R016C60

Northbound TL1 Interface User


Guide

Issue 01
Date 2017-01-26

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2017. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or
representations of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Contents

Contents

1 About This Document.................................................................................................................. 1


2 Change History.............................................................................................................................. 4
3 Usage Note.................................................................................................................................... 10
4 TL1 NBI Overview...................................................................................................................... 12
4.1 Introduction to the TL1 NBI.........................................................................................................................................13
4.2 Position in the Network................................................................................................................................................ 13
4.3 Communication Protocols............................................................................................................................................ 14
4.4 Functions and Features................................................................................................................................................. 14
4.5 Security Mechanism..................................................................................................................................................... 15
4.6 Performance Specifications.......................................................................................................................................... 17
4.7 Standard Compliance....................................................................................................................................................18
4.8 References.................................................................................................................................................................... 18

5 Relationships Between the License and TL1 NBI................................................................. 19


6 Installing and Enabling the NBI for Provisioning the TL1 Service.................................. 24
6.1 Configuration Requirements.........................................................................................................................................25
6.2 Installing a TL1 NBI Component................................................................................................................................. 25
6.3 Checking the Status of the TL1 NBI............................................................................................................................ 26

7 Maintaining the TL1 NBI...........................................................................................................27


7.1 Requirements for Maintenance Staff............................................................................................................................ 28
7.2 Routine Maintenance.................................................................................................................................................... 28
7.3 Logging in to the System Monitor Client..................................................................................................................... 29
7.4 Starting the TL1 Process...............................................................................................................................................31
7.5 Stopping the TL1 Process.............................................................................................................................................32
7.6 Checking the License Status of the U2000...................................................................................................................32
7.7 Creating a U2000 User for the Access of an OSS and Assign Rights to the User....................................................... 33

8 SSL Principle and Configuration............................................................................................. 36


8.1 SSL Principle................................................................................................................................................................ 37
8.2 Applying for an SSL Certificate................................................................................................................................... 37
8.3 Configuring an SSL Certificate.................................................................................................................................... 39

9 Setting Configuration Items......................................................................................................43

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Contents

10 Distributed System................................................................................................................... 66
10.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................... 67
10.2 List of Unsupported Commands.................................................................................................................................68
10.3 Maintaining the TL1 NBI Gateway Service...............................................................................................................69
10.4 Setting Configuration Items........................................................................................................................................70

11 Command Format...................................................................................................................... 74
11.1 Format Description..................................................................................................................................................... 75
11.2 Command Format Description....................................................................................................................................76
11.3 Response Format Description.....................................................................................................................................78
11.4 Format Description of the Resource Change Notification..........................................................................................80

12 Supported Devices of the Same Series..................................................................................82


13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a Device...................................... 83
13.1 Controlling the Session...............................................................................................................................................84
13.1.1 Logging in to the U2000 (LOGIN)..........................................................................................................................84
13.1.2 Logging In to the U2000 (ACT-USER)...................................................................................................................85
13.1.3 Exiting the U2000 (LOGOUT)................................................................................................................................87
13.1.4 Exiting the U2000 (CANC-USER)......................................................................................................................... 88
13.1.5 Querying the U2000 Version (LST-BMSVERSION)..............................................................................................89
13.1.6 Querying the NMS Information (LST-EMFSYSINFO)..........................................................................................90
13.1.7 Handshaking (SHAKEHAND)................................................................................................................................93
13.1.8 Handshaking (REPT-STAT).....................................................................................................................................94
13.2 Performing Operations on a Device........................................................................................................................... 95
13.2.1 Creating a Subnet (ADD-SUBNET)....................................................................................................................... 96
13.2.2 Modifying a Subnet (MOD-SUBNET)................................................................................................................... 97
13.2.3 Deleting a Subnet (DEL-SUBNET)........................................................................................................................ 98
13.2.4 Adding an NE Link (ADD-NELINK)................................................................................................................... 100
13.2.5 Modifying an NE Link (MOD-NELINK)............................................................................................................. 102
13.2.6 Deleting an NE Link (DEL-NELINK).................................................................................................................. 103
13.2.7 Synchronizing the Time (SYNC-DEVTIME)....................................................................................................... 104
13.2.8 Synchronizing NE Data (SYNC-DEV)................................................................................................................. 106
13.2.9 Deleting a Device (DEL-DEV)............................................................................................................................. 108
13.2.10 Resetting a Device (RESET-DEV)...................................................................................................................... 112
13.2.11 Resetting a Board (RESET-BOARD).................................................................................................................. 114
13.2.12 Changing the Device Name and Alias (MOD-DEV).......................................................................................... 116
13.2.13 Modifying the Shelf Name and Alias (MOD-FRAME)...................................................................................... 118
13.2.14 Modifying the Slot Alias (MOD-SLOT)............................................................................................................. 120
13.2.15 Exporting a Resource File (DMP-INVENTORY)...............................................................................................123
13.2.16 Exporting Service Port Statistics to Files (DMP-E2EPERF).............................................................................. 130
13.2.17 Exporting Ethernet Port Statistics to Files (DMP-ETHPERF)............................................................................133
13.2.18 Exporting PON Port Statistics to Files (DMP-PONPERF)................................................................................. 135
13.2.19 Adding a Device (ADD-DEV)............................................................................................................................ 138

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Contents

13.2.20 Adding a Board (ADD-BOARD)........................................................................................................................ 142


13.2.21 Deleting a Board (DEL-BOARD)....................................................................................................................... 144
13.2.22 Disabling a Board (DISABLE-BOARD)............................................................................................................ 147
13.2.23 Enabling a Board (ENABLE-BOARD).............................................................................................................. 149
13.2.24 Confirming a Board (CONFIRM-BOARD)........................................................................................................151
13.2.25 Switching Over the Active and Standby Control Boards (SYSTEM-SWITCH)................................................ 153
13.2.26 Activating a CATV Port (ACT-CATVPORT)..................................................................................................... 155
13.2.27 Deactivating a CATV Port (DACT-CATVPORT)............................................................................................... 157
13.2.28 Changing a Device IP Address (MOD-DEVIP)..................................................................................................159
13.2.29 Adding an Alarm to the U2000 (ADD-ALARM)............................................................................................... 161
13.2.30 Saving the Device Configuration (SAVE-DEV)................................................................................................. 164
13.2.31 Issuing the Command Configuration Script to a Device (CFG-DEVEX)...........................................................166
13.2.32 Issuing the Command Configuration Script to an MDE Device (CFG-MDUEX)..............................................177
13.2.33 Configuring the ANCP (CFG-PORTANCPINTERFACE)................................................................................. 182
13.2.34 Modifying System Attributes for NEs (CFG-DEVSYSPARA).......................................................................... 185

14 Notification of Resource Changes........................................................................................188


14.1 Notifying Resource Changes.................................................................................................................................... 189
14.1.1 Registering the Notification of Resource Changes (REG-RESCHGNOTIFY).................................................... 189
14.1.2 Canceling the Notification of Resource Changes (UREG-RESCHGNOTIFY)....................................................190
14.1.3 Querying the Notification of Resource Changes (LST-BMSRESCHANOTIFY)................................................ 191
14.2 Notifying Device Resource Changes........................................................................................................................193
14.2.1 Notifying Device Confirmation.............................................................................................................................194
14.2.2 Notifying Device Deletion.....................................................................................................................................195
14.2.3 Notifying Device Synchronization........................................................................................................................ 196
14.2.4 Notifying Shelf Confirmation................................................................................................................................198
14.2.5 Notifying the Shelf Deletion..................................................................................................................................199
14.2.6 Notifying Slot Confirmation..................................................................................................................................200
14.2.7 Notifying the Slot Deletion....................................................................................................................................202
14.2.8 Reporting Notifications of OLT Attribute Changes.............................................................................................. 203
14.2.9 Reporting Notifications of MDU Attribute Changes............................................................................................ 205
14.2.10 Reporting Notifications of ONU Addition.......................................................................................................... 207
14.2.11 Reporting Notifications of ONU Deletion...........................................................................................................209
14.2.12 Reporting Notifications of Board Attribute Changes.......................................................................................... 211
14.2.13 Notifying Plug and Play Deployment Completion..............................................................................................213
14.3 Notifying GPON Resource Changes........................................................................................................................ 215
14.3.1 Reporting Notifications on Initial Power-on of GPON ONUs.............................................................................. 215
14.3.2 Notifying the Event That an FTTH GPON ONU Port Is Online.......................................................................... 218
14.3.3 Notifying the Automatic Discovery of a GPON ONU..........................................................................................220
14.3.4 Notifying GPON ONU Replacement.................................................................................................................... 223
14.4 Notifying EPON Resource Changes.........................................................................................................................225
14.4.1 Reporting Notifications on Initial Power-on of EPON ONUs.............................................................................. 226
14.4.2 Notifying the Event That an FTTH ONU Port Is Online...................................................................................... 228

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Contents

14.4.3 Notifying the Automatic Discovery of an EPON ONU........................................................................................ 230


14.4.4 Notifying EPON ONU Replacement.....................................................................................................................232

15 Inventory Management.......................................................................................................... 236


15.1 Querying Device Resources..................................................................................................................................... 238
15.1.1 Querying a Subnet (LST-SUBNET)...................................................................................................................... 238
15.1.2 Querying an NE Link (LST-NELINK)..................................................................................................................241
15.1.3 Querying the Information About a Device (LST-DEV)........................................................................................ 244
15.1.4 Querying Device Global Configurations (LST-DEVCFG)................................................................................... 254
15.1.5 Querying CPU and Memory Information about an NE (LST-DEVINFO)........................................................... 258
15.1.6 Querying Subrack Information (LST-FRAME).................................................................................................... 261
15.1.7 Querying the Information About a Board (LST-BOARD)....................................................................................266
15.1.8 Querying Real-Time Performance Data of Boards (LST-BOARDPERF)............................................................ 273
15.1.9 Querying the Information About a Daughter Board (LST-SUBBOARD)............................................................ 275
15.1.10 Querying the Information About a Port (LST-PORT)......................................................................................... 279
15.1.11 Querying Protection Group Information (LST-PSG) ......................................................................................... 286
15.1.12 Querying the Alarms on the U2000 (LST-ALARM)...........................................................................................290
15.1.13 Querying the MAC Addresses Learnt by Devices (LST-OLTLEARNINGMAC)..............................................293
15.2 Querying ADSL Resources...................................................................................................................................... 296
15.2.1 Querying the Basic Information About an ADSL Port (LST-ADSLPORTCFG)................................................. 296
15.2.2 Querying Specified Information About ADSL Ports (LST-DSLPORTSPECIFYINFO)......................................299
15.2.3 Querying the Details of an ADSL Port (LST-DSLPORTDETAILINFO)............................................................. 303
15.2.4 Querying the List of ADSL Line Profiles (LST-ADSLLINEPROFILE).............................................................. 326
15.2.5 Querying the Details of an ADSL Line Profile (LST-ADSLLINEPROFILEDETAIL)........................................334
15.2.6 Querying the List of ADSL Alarm Profiles (LST-ADSLALARMPROFILE)......................................................343
15.2.7 Querying the List of ADSL Extended Profiles (LST-ADSLEXTENDPROFILE)............................................... 347
15.2.8 Querying the Details of an ADSL Extended Profile (LST-ADSLEXTENDPROFILEDETAIL).........................350
15.2.9 Querying the Alarm Information About an ADSL Port (LST-ADSLPORTALARM)..........................................357
15.2.10 Querying the Alarm Status of an xDSL Port (LST-XDSLPORTALARMSTATE)............................................. 360
15.2.11 Querying the Performance Statistics of an ADSL Port (LST-ADSLPORTPERF)..............................................365
15.2.12 Querying the Current Performance Statistics of an ADSL Port (LST-ADSLNTPORTPERF)...........................368
15.2.13 Querying Performance of ADSL Port in Current 15 Minutes and Last 15 Minutes (LST-
ADSLPORTQTRPERF)................................................................................................................................................... 372
15.2.14 Querying the Historical 15-minute Performance Statistics of an ADSL Port (LST-ADSLPORTHISQTRPERF)
.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 381
15.2.15 Querying Bit Allocation Information About an ADSL Port (LST-ADSLBITALLOCINFO)............................ 386
15.2.16 Querying the U-MAC/V-MAC of an xDSL Port (LST-XDSLPORTMACMAPING)....................................... 389
15.3 Querying G.SHDSL Resources................................................................................................................................ 392
15.3.1 Querying the Chipset Mode of a Board (LST-SHDSLBOARDCHIPSETMODE).............................................. 392
15.3.2 Querying the Details of an SHDSL Port (LST-SHDSLPORTDETAILINFO)......................................................394
15.3.3 Querying the List of SHDSL Line Profiles (LST-SHDSLSPANPROFILE).........................................................401
15.3.4 Querying the Details of an SHDSL Line Profile (LST-SHDSLSPANPROFILEDETAIL).................................. 403
15.3.5 Querying the Devices That Reference an SHDSL Line Profile (LST-DEVBYSP).............................................. 408
15.3.6 Querying the Ports That Reference an SHDSL Line Profile (LST-PORTBYSP)................................................. 410

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Contents

15.3.7 Querying the List of SHDSL Alarm Profiles (LST-SHDSLALARMPROFILE)................................................. 412


15.3.8 Querying the Details of an SHDSL Alarm Profile (LST-SHDSLALARMPROFILEDETAIL)...........................414
15.3.9 Querying the Devices That Reference an SHDSL Alarm Profile (LST-DEVBYAL)...........................................417
15.3.10 Querying the Ports That Reference an SHDSL Alarm Profile (LST-PORTBYAL)............................................419
15.3.11 Querying the Alarm Information About an SHDSL Port (LST-SHDSLPORTALARM)................................... 422
15.3.12 Querying the Performance Statistics of a G.SHDSL Port (LST-SHDSLPORTPERF)....................................... 425
15.3.13 Querying the FE1 Attribute of a TDM SHDSL Port (LST-SHDSLPORTFE1)..................................................432
15.4 Querying VDSL2 Resources.................................................................................................................................... 434
15.4.1 Querying the Details of a VDSL2 Port (LST-VDSL2PORTDETAILINFO)........................................................ 434
15.4.2 Querying Specified Information About VDSL2 Ports (LST-VDSL2PORTSPECIFYINFO)...............................465
15.4.3 Querying VDSL2 Port Information about Specified NEs (LST-NEVDSL2PORTDETAILINFO)...................... 480
15.4.4 Querying the Alarm Information About a VDSL2 Port (LST-VDSLPORTALARM)..........................................488
15.4.5 Querying the Performance Statistics on a VDSL2 Port (LST-VDSLPORTPERF)...............................................491
15.4.6 Querying a VDSL2 Line Profile (LST-VDSLLINEPROFILE)............................................................................ 506
15.4.7 Query the Details of a VDSL2 Line Profile (LST-VDSLLINEPROFILEDETAIL).............................................508
15.4.8 Querying a VDSL2 Alarm Profile (LST-VDSLALARMPROFILE).................................................................... 520
15.4.9 Query the Details of a VDSL2 Alarm Profile (LST-VDSLALARMPROFILEDETAIL).................................... 523
15.4.10 Querying the Alarm Status of an xDSL Port (LST-XDSLPORTALARMSTATE)............................................. 529
15.4.11 Querying Bit Allocation Information About a VDSL2 Port (LST-VDSL2BITALLOCINFO)...........................533
15.4.12 Querying the U-MAC/V-MAC of an xDSL Port (LST-XDSLPORTMACMAPING)....................................... 536
15.4.13 Querying Global VDSL2 Profile Names (LST-PROFNAME)........................................................................... 539
15.4.14 Querying NE-side VDSL2 Profile Names (TI Mode).........................................................................................541
15.4.14.1 Querying VDSL2 Service Profile Names (LST-VDSLSERVICEPROFILE).................................................. 542
15.4.14.2 Querying VDSL2 UPBO Profile Names (LST-VDSLUPBOPROFILE)......................................................... 544
15.4.14.3 Querying VDSL2 DPBO Profile Names (LST-VDSLDPBOPROFILE)......................................................... 546
15.4.14.4 Querying VDSL2 Spectrum Profile Names (LST-VDSLSPECPROFILE)..................................................... 548
15.4.14.5 Querying VDSL2 Alarm Profile Names (LST-VDSLTIALARMPROFILE).................................................. 550
15.4.14.6 Querying VDSL2 SNR Margin Profile Names (LST-VDSLNMPROFILE)................................................... 552
15.4.14.7 Querying VDSL2 Delay INP Profiles (LST-VDSLINPPROFILE)................................................................. 555
15.4.15 Querying the Performance Statistics on a GPON ONT VDSL2 Port (LST-ONTVDSLPORTPERF)............... 557
15.4.16 Querying the Details of a GPON ONT VDSL2 Port (LST-ONTVDSL2PORTDETAILINFO).........................567
15.4.17 Querying Specified Information About GPON ONT VDSL2 Ports (LST-ONTVDSL2PORTSPECIFYINFO)
.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 581
15.5 Querying G.fast Resources....................................................................................................................................... 592
15.5.1 Querying the Details of a G.fast Port (LST-GFASTPORTDETAILINFO)........................................................... 592
15.5.2 Querying G.fast Port Information About Specified NEs (LST-NEGFASTPORTDETAILINFO)........................615
15.5.3 Querying the Alarm Information About a G.fast Port (LST-GFASTPORTALARM)...........................................621
15.5.4 Querying the Performance Statistics on a G.fast Port (LST-GFASTPORTPERF)................................................624
15.5.5 Querying the Alarm Status of an xDSL Port (LST-XDSLPORTALARMSTATE)............................................... 636
15.5.6 Querying the Bit Allocation Information About a G.fast Port (LST-GFASTBITALLOCINFO)......................... 641
15.5.7 Querying the U-MAC/V-MAC of an xDSL Port (LST-XDSLPORTMACMAPING)......................................... 643
15.6 Querying a Bonding Group...................................................................................................................................... 646
15.6.1 Querying a Bonding Group (RTRV-BONDGRP)..................................................................................................646

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Contents

15.6.2 Querying the Details of a Bonding Group (RTRV-BONDGRPDETAIL).............................................................649


15.6.3 Querying Performance Statistics of a VDSL2 Bonding Group (LST-VDSL2BONDINGGROUPPERF)........... 653
15.6.4 Querying the Details of a VDSL2 Bonding Group (LST-VDSL2BONDINGDETAILINFO)............................. 658
15.7 Querying Video Resources....................................................................................................................................... 661
15.7.1 Querying the List of Virtual Upstream Ports in an IGMP VLAN (LST-IGMPUPLINKPORT).......................... 661
15.7.2 Querying the Information About Multicast Programs (LST-NTVPROGRAM)................................................... 664
15.7.3 Querying the Detail Information of a Multicast User (LST-NTVUSRDETAIL)..................................................671
15.7.4 Querying the List of Multicast Users (LST-NTVPORTBASIC)...........................................................................679
15.7.5 Querying the Rights Profile of a Multicast User (LST-NTVPORTRP)................................................................ 689
15.7.6 Querying Rights Profiles (LST-NTVRP).............................................................................................................. 699
15.7.7 Querying the Programs Specified in a Rights Profile (LST-RPPROGRAM)....................................................... 701
15.7.8 Querying the Multicast VLAN Information of a Device (RTRV-IGMPVLAN)...................................................705
15.7.9 Querying the Multicast VLAN of a Multicast User (LST-NTVUSRIGMPVLAN)............................................. 707
15.7.10 Querying the Details of a Multicast VLAN (RTRV-IGMPVLANDETAIL).......................................................716
15.7.11 Querying the Details on a Multicast VLAN (LST-IGMPVLANDETAIL)......................................................... 720
15.7.12 Querying the Multicast Subtend Port (LST-NTVCASCADE)............................................................................725
15.8 Querying GPON Resources......................................................................................................................................729
15.8.1 Querying the List of GPON Ports (LST-GPONPORT)......................................................................................... 729
15.8.2 Querying the Details of a GPON Port (LST-GPONPORTDETAIL).....................................................................732
15.8.3 Querying the Information About an Upstream GPON Port (LST-GPONNNIPORT)...........................................739
15.8.4 Querying the List of ONUs (LST-ONT)................................................................................................................742
15.8.5 Querying the Details of an ONT (LST-ONTDETAIL)..........................................................................................753
15.8.6 Querying the IP Address of a GPON ONT (LST-ONTIPINFO)...........................................................................762
15.8.7 Querying the Information About Auto-Discovered GPON ONUs (LST-GPONONTAUTOFIND).....................766
15.8.8 Querying the Running Status of an ONT (LST-ONTRUNINFO).........................................................................770
15.8.9 Querying the List of ONT Ports (LST-ONTPORT).............................................................................................. 776
15.8.10 Querying the Details of an ONT Port (LST-ONTPORTDETAIL)......................................................................780
15.8.11 Querying the Ethernet Port Details of a GPON ONT (LST-GPONONTETHPORTDETAIL)........................... 787
15.8.12 Querying the Status of an ONU POTS User (LST-ONTPOTSSTATE).............................................................. 790
15.8.13 Querying the MAC Addresses Learned by the User Port of an FTTH ONU (LST-GPONONTPORTMAC)....794
15.8.14 Querying the Details of GPON Optical Modules (LST-GPONSFP)...................................................................799
15.8.15 Querying the Parameters of the Optical Module of an ONT (LST-ONTDDMDETAIL)................................... 805
15.8.16 Querying the Optical Module Information of an MDU NNI Port (LST-ONUNNIDDMDETAIL)....................811
15.8.17 Querying the Ethernet Transmission Feature of an Upstream Port of an ONT (LST-ONTETHPORTPERF)... 814
15.8.18 Querying the List of DBA Profiles Bound to an ONT (LST-ONTDBAPROF)..................................................821
15.8.19 Querying the List of GEM Ports (LST-GEMPORT)........................................................................................... 824
15.8.20 Querying the List of GEM Connections (LST-GEMCONNECTION)............................................................... 830
15.8.21 Querying the Real-Time Performance Data of Ethernet Traffic on a GPON UNI Port (LST-GPONPORTPERF)
.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 835
15.8.22 Querying the Real-Time Performance Data of a GPON ONT Ethernet Port (LST-GPONONTETHPORTPERF)
.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 838
15.8.23 Querying the ONT WAN Port Information (LST-ONTWAN)............................................................................ 842
15.8.24 Querying ONT SIP User Accounts (LST-ONTSIPINFO).................................................................................. 846

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Contents

15.8.25 Querying GPON Line Profile Names (LST-GPONLINEPROFILE).................................................................. 850


15.8.26 Querying GPON Service Profile Names (LST-GPONSRVPROFILE)............................................................... 852
15.8.27 Query the DHCP IP Configuration of an ONT (LST-ONTIPCONFIG)............................................................. 854
15.8.28 Querying the VoIP Address of an ONT (LST-ONTVAGVOIP)......................................................................... 858
15.8.29 Querying the ONT PSTN User Information (LST-ONTVOIPPSTNUSER)...................................................... 862
15.8.30 Querying the VLAN Switching Pair for an Ethernet Port on a GPON ONT (LST-
ONTETHVLANSWTICHPAIR)......................................................................................................................................870
15.8.31 Querying the Traffic Shaping Information of an ONT Queue (LST-ONTQUEUESHAPING)..........................874
15.8.32 Querying the GPON Optical Module Information (LST-GPONDDMINFO).....................................................877
15.8.33 Querying the Transmission Feature of a GPON NNI Port (LST-GPONNNIPERF)...........................................881
15.8.34 Querying the First Idle GEM Port ID of GPON Ports (LST-FRSTIDLGEM)....................................................884
15.8.35 Exporting POTS Service Provisioning Statistical Files (DMP-POTSPERF)..................................................... 887
15.8.36 Exporting GPON ONT Online Status Statistical Files (DMP-ONTPERF)........................................................ 889
15.8.37 Querying GPON MDU Replacement Tasks (LST-ONTRM)..............................................................................891
15.8.38 Querying Call Record of a ONT Pots (LST-ONTPOTSCALLRECORD)......................................................... 897
15.8.39 Querying Details About a Global GPON Line Profile(LST-GLOBALGPONLINEPROFILEDETAIL)...........902
15.8.40 Querying a Global GPON Line Profile Name List(LST-GLOBALGPONLINEPROFILENAME)...................905
15.8.41 Querying Details About a Global GPON Service Profile (LST-GLOBALGPONSRVPROFILEDETAIL).......907
15.8.42 Querying a Global GPON Service Profile Name List (LST-GLOBALGPONSRVPROFILENAME)...............910
15.8.43 Querying Details About a Global GPON DBA Profile (LST-GLOBALDBAPROFILEDETAIL).................... 912
15.8.44 Querying a Global GPON DBA Profile Name List (LST-GLOBALDBAPROFILENAME)............................ 916
15.9 Querying EPON Resources...................................................................................................................................... 918
15.9.1 Querying Information About an Upstream EPON ONU Port (LST-EPONNNIPORT)........................................918
15.9.2 Querying the List of EPON ONTs (LST-EPONONT).......................................................................................... 921
15.9.3 Querying Information About Auto-discovered EPON ONUs (LST-EPONONTAUTOFIND)............................ 929
15.9.4 Querying the Running Status of an ONT (LST-EPONONTRUNINFO).............................................................. 932
15.9.5 Querying the Ethernet Port Details of an EPON ONT (LST-EPONONTETHPORTDETAIL)............................939
15.9.6 Querying the MAC Addresses Learned by the User Port of an FTTH ONU (LST-EPONONTPORTMAC)...... 942
15.9.7 Querying the EPON Information of an MDU Device (LST-EPONBYONUDEV).............................................. 947
15.9.8 Querying Optical Module Information About an EPON ONT (LST-EPONONTDDMDETAIL)........................951
15.9.9 Querying the Optical Module Information of an MDU NNI Port (LST-ONUNNIDDMDETAIL) .....................955
15.9.10 Querying Details on EPON Optical Modules (LST-EPONSFP).........................................................................958
15.9.11 Querying Optical Module Information About an EPON Port (LST-EPONPORTDDMDETAIL)..................... 964
15.9.12 Querying the EPON Port Details (LST-EPONPORTDETAIL)...........................................................................968
15.9.13 Querying Real-Time Performance Data of an EPON Port (LST-EPONPONPORTPERF)................................ 972
15.9.14 Querying Real-Time Performance Data of Ethernet Traffic on an EPON UNI Port (LST-EPONPORTPERF) 975
15.9.15 Querying Real-Time Performance Data on an EPON ONT Ethernet Port (LST-EPONONTETHPORTPERF)
.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 979
15.9.16 Querying ONT SIP User Accounts (LST-ONTSIPINFO).................................................................................. 982
15.9.17 Querying the VoIP Address of an ONT (LST-ONTVAGVOIP)......................................................................... 985
15.9.18 Querying the ONT PSTN User Information (LST-ONTVOIPPSTNUSER)...................................................... 989
15.9.19 Querying Call Record of a ONT Pots (LST-ONTPOTSCALLRECORD)......................................................... 998
15.10 CNU Resource Query........................................................................................................................................... 1003

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Contents

15.10.1 Querying the List of CNUs (LST-CNU)............................................................................................................1003


15.10.2 Querying the Details of a CNU (LST-CNUDETAIL)....................................................................................... 1007
15.11 Querying CM Resources.......................................................................................................................................1011
15.11.1 Querying the Info of CM (LST-CMINFO)........................................................................................................1012
15.11.2 Querying the CPE List of a CM (LST-CMCPELIST).......................................................................................1015
15.11.3 Collecting Statistics on a CM (LST-CMNUMSTATIC)....................................................................................1018
15.11.4 Querying the List of CMs (LST-CMLIST)........................................................................................................1022
15.11.5 Querying the Quality of CM Upstream Channels (LST-CMUPCHANNELINFO)..........................................1031
15.11.6 Querying the Quality of CM Downstream Channels (LST-CMDOWNCHANNELINFO)..............................1035
15.11.7 Querying the Downstream Channel Info List of RF Ports (LST-DOWNCHANNELINFO)............................1039
15.11.8 Querying the Upstream Channel Info List of RF Ports (LST-UPCHANNELINFO)........................................1043
15.11.9 Querying the Details of a CM (LST-CMDETAIL)............................................................................................1048
15.11.10 Querying the PNM Pre-equalization Coefficients of a CM (LST-CMPNM-EQD).........................................1057
15.11.11 Querying the PNM Auxiliary Parameters of a CM (LST-CMPNM-SUB)......................................................1064
15.11.12 Querying the Layer 2 VPN VLAN of a CM (LST-L2VPNVLAN)................................................................ 1071
15.11.13 Querying Amplifier Details (LST-AMPDETAIL)...........................................................................................1074
15.12 Querying VLAN Resources..................................................................................................................................1078
15.12.1 Querying the VLAN Information of a Device (LST-VLAN)............................................................................1078
15.12.2 Querying the Details of a VLAN (LST-VLANDETAIL)..................................................................................1084
15.12.3 Querying the VLAN ID of an xDSL Port (LST-DSLPORTVLAN)................................................................. 1090
15.12.4 Querying the List of Ports in a VLAN (LST-PORTOFVLAN).........................................................................1093
15.12.5 Querying the VLAN ID of a Port (LST-VLANOFPORT)................................................................................ 1097
15.12.6 Querying the Transmission Feature of a VLAN (LST-VLANPERF)............................................................... 1100
15.12.7 Querying an L3 Interface (LST-VLANL3IF).................................................................................................... 1105
15.13 Querying Ethernet Resources............................................................................................................................... 1109
15.13.1 Querying the Details of an Ethernet Port (LST-ETHPORTDETAILINFO)......................................................1109
15.13.2 Querying an Ethernet Aggregation Group (LST-LAG)..................................................................................... 1117
15.13.3 Querying the List of Vlan in Aggregation Group (LST-VLANOFLAG)..........................................................1122
15.13.4 Querying the Details of an SFP (LST-SFPDETAILINFO)............................................................................... 1124
15.13.5 Querying the SFP Information of a Device (LST-SFP).....................................................................................1130
15.13.6 Querying the Upstream Traffic Information of an Ethernet Port (LST-ETHPORTSTATINFO)...................... 1136
15.13.7 Querying the DDM Details of an Optical Module (LST-DDMDETAILINFO)................................................1140
15.13.8 Querying the Ethernet Transmission Statistics (LST-ETHPORTPERF)........................................................... 1144
15.13.9 Querying the List of Ethernet Ports (LST-ETHPORT)......................................................................................1149
15.13.10 Querying the MAC Addresses Learned by the Service Port of an FTTB ONU (LST-ETHPORTMAC)....... 1154
15.14 Querying Service Virtual Port Resources............................................................................................................. 1158
15.14.1 Querying Service Virtual Ports (LST-SERVICEPORT).................................................................................... 1158
15.14.2 Querying the Service Port Information about NEs (LST-NESERVICEPORTDETAIL).................................. 1183
15.14.3 Querying the Details of a Service Virtual Port (LST-SERVICEPORTDETAIL).............................................. 1188
15.14.4 Querying the Static IP Addresses of a Service Port (LST-IP2SERVICEPORT)...............................................1209
15.14.5 Querying the Performance Statistics of Service Ports (LST-SERVICEPORTPERF)....................................... 1220
15.14.6 Querying CAR Groups (LST-CARGROUP).....................................................................................................1233

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Contents

15.14.7 Querying Bundles of Service Virtual Ports (LST-SERVICEPORTBUNDLE)................................................. 1236


15.14.8 Querying the MAC Addresses Learned By a User Port and Its Service Port (LST-PORTMACADDRESS).. 1239
15.15 Querying PVC Resources..................................................................................................................................... 1250
15.15.1 Querying the Information About a PVC (LST-PVC)........................................................................................ 1250
15.15.2 Querying the Information About a VPI (LST-VPI)...........................................................................................1257
15.15.3 Querying Anti-DoS Attack Information of Service Flows (LST-ANTIDOS).................................................. 1260
15.16 Querying TDM E1 Resources.............................................................................................................................. 1263
15.16.1 Querying Local TDM E1 Connections (LST-NATIVETDMCONN)............................................................... 1264
15.16.2 Querying the Attribute of a PRI E1 Port (LST-PRIE1)..................................................................................... 1269
15.17 Querying Traffic Profile Resources...................................................................................................................... 1273
15.17.1 Querying a global ATM Traffic Profile (LST-ATMTP).................................................................................... 1273
15.17.2 Querying an IP Traffic Profile (LST-IPTP)....................................................................................................... 1276
15.17.3 Querying a global MEF IP Traffic Profile (LST-MEFIPTP).............................................................................1279
15.18 Querying PSTN Resources................................................................................................................................... 1285
15.18.1 Querying a V5 PSTN User (LST-V5PSTNUSER)............................................................................................1285
15.19 Querying the ISDN Resources............................................................................................................................. 1289
15.19.1 Querying a V5 ISDN BRA User (LST-V5BRAUSER).................................................................................... 1289
15.19.2 Querying a V5 ISDN PRA User (LST-V5PRAUSER)..................................................................................... 1293
15.20 Querying VoIP Resources.....................................................................................................................................1297
15.20.1 Querying a VoIP PSTN User (LST-VOIPPSTNUSER).................................................................................... 1297
15.20.2 Querying the List of Configured VoIP PSTN Users (LST-VOIPPOTSBASIC)............................................... 1321
15.20.3 Querying the Performance Data of a VoIP PSTN Port (LST-VOIPPSTNPERF)............................................. 1329
15.20.4 Querying the Extended Telephone Numbers of a VoIP PSTN Port (LST-VOIPPSTNEXTTELNO)...............1332
15.20.5 Querying the User Name and Password of a VoIP PSTN Port (LST-VOIPPSTNACCOUNT)....................... 1335
15.20.6 Querying Members of an CLI Account Group (LST-CGMEMBER)............................................................... 1338
15.20.7 Querying CLI Account Groups (LST-CLIGROUP)..........................................................................................1340
15.20.8 Querying Service Rights and Service Data of VoIP PSTN Users (LST-VOIPPSTNSRV)............................... 1342
15.20.9 Querying a VoIP ISDN BRA User (LST-VOIPBRAUSER).............................................................................1350
15.20.10 Querying the List of Configured VoIP ISDN BRA Users (LST-VOIPBRABASIC)......................................1364
15.20.11 Querying Authentication Information About a VoIP ISDN BRA Port (LST-VOIPBRAACCOUNT)...........1369
15.20.12 Querying Service Rights of a VoIP ISDN BRA Port (LST-VOIPBRASRV)..................................................1372
15.20.13 Querying the Extended Phone Number of a VoIP ISDN BRA Port (LST-VOIPBRAEXTTELNO)..............1379
15.20.14 Querying a VoIP ISDN PRA User (LST-VOIPPRAUSER)............................................................................1381
15.20.15 Querying the List of Configured VoIP ISDN PRA Users (LST-VOIPPRABASIC).......................................1393
15.20.16 Querying Authentication Information About a VoIP ISDN PRA Port (LST-VOIPPRAACCOUNT)............1398
15.20.17 Querying Service Rights of VoIP ISDN PRA Ports (LST-VOIPPRASRV)....................................................1401
15.20.18 Querying the Extended Phone Number of a VoIP ISDN PRA Port (LST-VOIPPRAEXTTELNO).............. 1404
15.20.19 Querying the VBD Parameter of Voice Ports (LST-VOIPVBD).................................................................... 1407
15.20.20 Querying SIP User Groups (LST-USERGROUP)...........................................................................................1410
15.20.21 Querying an MGC Global Profile (LST-MGCD)............................................................................................1414
15.20.22 Querying a VAG (LST-VAG).......................................................................................................................... 1416
15.20.23 Querying the MGCD Associated with a VAG (LST-MGCDOFVAG)............................................................1421

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential x


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Contents

15.20.24 Querying a VSG (LST-VSG)...........................................................................................................................1423


15.20.25 Querying an Association (LST-ASSOCIATION)............................................................................................1426
15.20.26 Querying the Hunting Group List (LST-HUNTINGGROU).......................................................................... 1429
15.20.27 Querying the Hunting Group Member List (LST-HGMEMBER).................................................................. 1432
15.20.28 Querying the Group Account List (LST-GROUPNUMBER).........................................................................1435
15.20.29 Querying Service Rights and Service Data for Group Accounts (LST-GROUPNUMBERSRV)...................1438
15.20.30 Querying Authentication Information for Group Accounts (LST-GROUPNUMBERAUTH).......................1442
15.20.31 Querying Call Release Cause Codes in a Hunting Group (LST-HUNTINGSTOPCAUSECODE)............... 1445
15.20.32 Querying a Global Number Change Profile (LST-NUMCHGPROFILE).......................................................1447
15.20.33 Querying the VBD Parameter of Voice Ports (LST-VOIPVBD).................................................................... 1450
15.20.34 Querying Physical Information Corresponding to Telephone Numbers (LST-TELNUMLOCATIONINFO)1453
15.21 Querying SPC Resources......................................................................................................................................1456
15.21.1 Querying the List of SPCs (LST-SPC).............................................................................................................. 1456
15.21.2 Querying the Details of an SPC (DTL-SPC).....................................................................................................1462
15.22 Querying ACL and QoS Resources......................................................................................................................1470
15.22.1 Querying ACL Groups (LST-ACLGRP)...........................................................................................................1471
15.22.2 Querying the Subitems of an Extended ACL Group (LST-ACLEXTSUBITEM)............................................1474
15.22.3 Querying the Subitems of a Standard ACL Group (LST-ACLBASESUBITEM)............................................ 1479
15.22.4 Querying the Subitems of a Layer 2 ACL Group (LST-ACLLINKSUBITEM)...............................................1482
15.22.5 Querying Port Rate Limit (LST-QOSRATELIMIT)......................................................................................... 1485
15.22.6 Querying a Traffic Limit on a Port (LST-QOSTRAFFICLIMIT).....................................................................1489
15.23 Querying HQoS Resources...................................................................................................................................1493
15.23.1 Querying the Information About an HQoS User Group (LST-HQOS)............................................................. 1494

16 Service Provisioning............................................................................................................. 1497


16.1 ADSL Service Provisioning................................................................................................................................... 1500
16.1.1 Creating an ADSL Line Profile (CRT-ADSLLINEPROFILE)........................................................................... 1500
16.1.2 Deleting an ADSL Line Profile (DEL-ADSLLINEPROFILE)...........................................................................1511
16.1.3 Deleting an ADSL Line Profile from a Device (DEL-ADSLLPOFDEV).......................................................... 1513
16.1.4 Creating an ADSL Alarm Profile (CRT-ADSLALARMPROFILE)...................................................................1515
16.1.5 Deleting an ADSL Alarm Profile (DEL-ADSLALARMPROFILE).................................................................. 1517
16.1.6 Deleting an ADSL Alarm Profile from a Device (DEL-ADSLAPOFDEV).......................................................1519
16.1.7 Creating an ADSL Extended Profile (CRT-ADSLEXTENDPROFILE)............................................................ 1521
16.1.8 Deleting an ADSL Extended Profile (DEL-ADSLEXTENDPROFILE)............................................................1527
16.1.9 Deleting an ADSL Extended Profile from a Device (DEL-ADSLEPOFDEV).................................................. 1529
16.1.10 Activating an ADSL Port (ACT-ADSLPORT)................................................................................................. 1531
16.1.11 Deactivating an ADSL Port (DACT-ADSLPORT)........................................................................................... 1533
16.1.12 Modifying the Attributes of an ADSL Port (MOD-ADSLPORT).................................................................... 1535
16.1.13 Modifying the Attributes of an ADSL Port Through the Enhanced Command (MOD-ADSLPORTEX)........1542
16.1.14 Modifying the Working Mode of an ADSL Port (MOD-ADSLWORKMODE).............................................. 1558
16.1.15 Initializing an ADSL Port (INIT-ADSLPORT).................................................................................................1559
16.2 G.SHDSL Service Provisioning............................................................................................................................. 1561
16.2.1 Creating an SHDSL Line Profile (CRT-SHDSLSPANPROFILE)......................................................................1562

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Contents

16.2.2 Deleting an SHDSL Line Profile (DEL-SHDSLSPANPROFILE)..................................................................... 1569


16.2.3 Deleting an SHDSL Line Profile from a Device (DEL-SHDSLSPONDEV)..................................................... 1571
16.2.4 Creating an SHDSL Alarm Profile (CRT-SHDSLALARMPROFILE).............................................................. 1573
16.2.5 Deleting an SHDSL Alarm Profile (DEL-SHDSLALARMPROFILE)..............................................................1575
16.2.6 Deleting an SHDSL Alarm Profile from a Device (DEL-SHDSLALONDEV)................................................. 1577
16.2.7 Activating an SHDSL Port (ACT-SHDSLPORT)............................................................................................... 1579
16.2.8 Deactivating an SHDSL Port (DACT-SHDSLPORT).........................................................................................1581
16.2.9 Binding SHDSL Ports (BND-SHDSLPORT)..................................................................................................... 1583
16.2.10 Unbinding SHDSL Ports (UBND-SHDSLPORT)............................................................................................ 1585
16.2.11 Modifying the Attributes of an SHDSL Port (MOD-SHDSLPORT)................................................................ 1587
16.2.12 Performing a Loopback on an SHDSL Port (LOOPBACK-SHDSLPORT)..................................................... 1592
16.2.13 Canceling a Loopback Test on an SHDSL Port (ULOOPBACK-SHDSLPORT)............................................ 1594
16.2.14 Configuring the Chipset Mode of a Board (CFG-SHDSLBOARDCHIPSETMODE)..................................... 1596
16.2.15 Modifying the FE1 Attribute of a TDM SHDSL Port (MOD-SHDSLPORTFE1)........................................... 1598
16.3 VDSL2 Service Provisioning................................................................................................................................. 1600
16.3.1 Activating a VDSL2 Port (ACT-VDSL2PORT)................................................................................................. 1600
16.3.2 Deactivating a VDSL2 Port (DACT-VDSL2PORT)........................................................................................... 1603
16.3.3 Modifying the Attributes of a VDSL2 Port (MOD-VDSL2PORT).................................................................... 1606
16.3.4 Modifying the Attributes of a VDSL2 Port Through the Enhanced Command (MOD-VDSL2PORTEX)........1610
16.3.5 Activating a GPON ONT VDSL2 Port (ACT-ONTVDSL2PORT).................................................................... 1627
16.3.6 Deactivating a GPON ONT VDSL2 Port (DACT-ONTVDSL2PORT)..............................................................1630
16.3.7 Modifying the Attributes of a GPON ONT VDSL2 Port (MOD-ONTVDSL2PORT)....................................... 1632
16.3.8 Modifying the Attributes of a GPON ONT VDSL2 Port Through the Enhanced Command(MOD-
ONTVDSL2PORTEX)................................................................................................................................................... 1635
16.4 G.fast Service Provisioning.................................................................................................................................... 1641
16.4.1 Activating a G.fast Port (ACT-GFASTPORT).................................................................................................... 1641
16.4.2 Deactivating a G.fast Port (DACT-GFASTPORT)..............................................................................................1643
16.4.3 Modifying the Attributes of a G.fast Port (MOD-GFASTPORT)....................................................................... 1645
16.4.4 Binding a G.fast TDD Profile (MOD-GFASTPROFILE)...................................................................................1650
16.5 Bonding Group Management................................................................................................................................. 1651
16.5.1 Adding a Bonding Group (ENT-BONDGRP)..................................................................................................... 1651
16.5.2 Modifying the Attributes of a Bonding Group (ED-BONDGRP).......................................................................1655
16.5.3 Deleting a Bonding Group (DLT-BONDGRP)....................................................................................................1659
16.5.4 Activating a Bonding Group (ACT-BONDGRP)................................................................................................1661
16.5.5 Deactivating a Bonding Group (DACT-BONDGRP)......................................................................................... 1663
16.5.6 Associating Ports with a Bonding Group (ASS-BONDGRP).............................................................................1666
16.5.7 Disassociating Ports from a Bonding Group (DASS-BONDGRP).....................................................................1668
16.6 Video Service Provisioning.................................................................................................................................... 1671
16.6.1 Provisioning the Multicast Service (JOIN-NTVUSR/JOIN-NTV).....................................................................1671
16.6.2 Modifying the Attributes of a Multicast User (MOD-NTVUSR/MOD-NTVPORT)......................................... 1691
16.6.3 Stopping the Multicast Service (QUIT-NTV)..................................................................................................... 1706
16.6.4 Suspending the Multicast Service (BLK-NTVPORT)........................................................................................ 1716
16.6.5 Re-provisioning the Multicast Service (UBLK-NTVPORT).............................................................................. 1725

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Contents

16.6.6 Adding Rights Profiles for a Multicast User (BND-NTVUSRRP/BND-NTVRP)............................................. 1733


16.6.7 Deleting Rights Profiles of a Multicast User (UBND-NTVUSRRP/UBND-NTVRP).......................................1742
16.6.8 Adding a Program Profile to a Device (ADD-NTVPROGRAM)....................................................................... 1751
16.6.9 Deleting a Program Profile from a Device (DEL-NTVPROGRAM)................................................................. 1757
16.6.10 Binding or Unbinding Rights Profiles on Schedule (BND-NTVUSRRP-SCHEDULE)..................................1760
16.6.11 Binding Rights Profiles with an NE (BND-NTVALLUSRRP).........................................................................1768
16.6.12 Unbinding Rights Profiles from an NE (UBND-NTVALLUSRRP).................................................................1771
16.6.13 Adding a Multicast VLAN (ADD-IGMPVLAN)............................................................................................. 1773
16.6.14 Deleting a Multicast VLAN (DEL-IGMPVLAN).............................................................................................1779
16.6.15 Adding a Multicast Subtend Port (ADD-NTVCASCADE).............................................................................. 1782
16.6.16 Deleting a Multicast Subtend Port (DEL-NTVCASCADE)............................................................................. 1786
16.6.17 Adding a Virtual Upstream Port of a Multicast VLAN (ADD-IGMPUPLINKPORT).....................................1789
16.6.18 Deleting a Virtual Upstream Port of a Multicast VLAN (DEL-IGMPUPLINKPORT)....................................1792
16.7 GPON Service Provisioning................................................................................................................................... 1795
16.7.1 Adding an ONU (ADD-ONT)............................................................................................................................. 1795
16.7.2 Modifying an ONU (MOD-ONT)....................................................................................................................... 1811
16.7.3 Deleting an ONT (DEL-ONT)............................................................................................................................ 1826
16.7.4 Activating an ONT (ACT-ONT)..........................................................................................................................1830
16.7.5 Deactivating an ONT (DACT-ONT)................................................................................................................... 1833
16.7.6 Resetting an ONT (RESET-ONT)....................................................................................................................... 1836
16.7.7 Binding a DBA Profile to an ONT (BIND-ONTDBAPROF).............................................................................1839
16.7.8 Modifying the DBA Profile Bound to an ONT (MOD-ONTDBAPROF).......................................................... 1841
16.7.9 Unbinding a DBA Profile from an ONT (DBIND-ONTDBAPROF)................................................................. 1844
16.7.10 Adding a User VLAN for an ONT (ADD-ONTPORTVLAN)......................................................................... 1847
16.7.11 Deleting a User VLAN from an ONT (DEL-ONTPORTVLAN)..................................................................... 1850
16.7.12 Binding an ONT Port to a User VLAN (BIND-ONTPORTVLAN)................................................................. 1854
16.7.13 Unbinding an ONT Port from a User VLAN (DBIND-ONTPORTVLAN)..................................................... 1858
16.7.14 Adding a Binding Group for Ethernet Ports on a GPON ONT (ADD-ONTPORTBUNDLE)......................... 1861
16.7.15 Deleting a Binding Group of Ethernet Ports on a GPON ONT (DEL-ONTPORTBUNDLE)......................... 1865
16.7.16 Adding a VLAN Switching Pair for an Ethernet Port on a GPON ONT (ADD-ONTETHVLANSWTICHPAIR)
........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1868
16.7.17 Deleting a VLAN Switching Pair from an Ethernet Port on a GPON ONT (DEL-
ONTETHVLANSWTICHPAIR)....................................................................................................................................1874
16.7.18 Resetting the Function for Enabling the Discovery of the ONT SN (RESET-ONTSNSWITCH)....................1879
16.7.19 Adding a GEM Port (ADD-GEMPORT).......................................................................................................... 1881
16.7.20 Modifying a GEM Port (MOD-GEMPORT).....................................................................................................1885
16.7.21 Deleting a GEM Port (DEL-GEMPORT)..........................................................................................................1889
16.7.22 Binding a GEM Port to an ONT (BIND-ONTGEMPORT).............................................................................. 1891
16.7.23 Unbinding a GEM Port from an ONT (DBIND-ONTGEMPORT).................................................................. 1894
16.7.24 Adding a GEM Connection (ADD-GEMCONNECTION)...............................................................................1897
16.7.25 Modifying a GEM Connection (MOD-GEMCONNECTION).........................................................................1902
16.7.26 Deleting a GEM Connection (DEL-GEMCONNECTION)..............................................................................1907
16.7.27 Modifying the User Port of an ONT (MOD-ONTPORT)................................................................................. 1911

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Contents

16.7.28 Configuring a Customized VAS of a GPON Terminal (CFG-ONTVAINDIV)................................................ 1918


16.7.29 Configuring the GPON FTTH Service (CFG-ONTSVC)................................................................................. 1934
16.7.30 Configuring the GPON FTTB Service (CFG-PORTSVC)................................................................................1942
16.7.31 Adding the CoS for a GEM Port (ADD-GEMPORTCOS)............................................................................... 1949
16.7.32 Deleting the CoS of a GEM Port (DEL-GEMPORTCOS)................................................................................1953
16.7.33 Adding the IP Configuration to an ONT (ADD-ONTIPCONFIG)................................................................... 1957
16.7.34 Configuring ONT Voice Users (CFG-ONT-POTS)...........................................................................................1960
16.7.35 Deleting ONT Voice Services (DLT-ONT-POTS).............................................................................................1969
16.7.36 Replacing a GPON ONU (REPLACE-ONT)....................................................................................................1972
16.7.37 Deleting a GPON MDU Replacement Task (DEL-ONTRM)...........................................................................1976
16.7.38 Canceling an MDU Replacement Task (CANCEL-ONTRM).......................................................................... 1980
16.7.39 Configuring the WAN Port VLAN of an ONT (CFG-ONTVLAN)................................................................. 1984
16.7.40 Configuring the TR-069 Management Channel for a GPON ONT (CFG-ACSSERVERINFO)......................1987
16.7.41 Changing the Password for Logging In to the Local ONT Web Page (SET-ONTUSERINFO)....................... 1992
16.7.42 Creating a Global GPON Line Profile(ADD-GLOBALGPONLINEPROFILE)..............................................1996
16.7.43 Deleting a Global GPON Line Profile(DEL-GLOBALGPONLINEPROFILE).............................................. 1998
16.7.44 Creating a Global GPON Service Profile (ADD-GLOBALGPONSRVPROFILE)..........................................2000
16.7.45 Deleting a Global GPON Service Profile (DEL-GLOBALGPONSRVPROFILE).......................................... 2003
16.7.46 Creating a Global GPON DBA Profile (ADD-GLOBALDBAPROFILE)....................................................... 2005
16.7.47 Deleting a Global GPON DBA Profile (DEL-GLOBALDBAPROFILE)........................................................ 2007
16.8 EPON Service Provisioning................................................................................................................................... 2009
16.8.1 Adding an EPON ONT (ADD-EPONONT)....................................................................................................... 2009
16.8.2 Modifying an EPON ONT (MOD-EPONONT)..................................................................................................2025
16.8.3 Modifying an EPON ONT Port (MOD-EPONONTPORT)................................................................................ 2036
16.8.4 Deleting an EPON ONT (DEL-EPONONT).......................................................................................................2041
16.8.5 Activating an EPON ONT (ACT-EPONONT)....................................................................................................2045
16.8.6 Deactivating an EPON ONT (DACT-EPONONT)............................................................................................. 2049
16.8.7 Resetting an EPON ONT (RESET-EPONONT)................................................................................................. 2052
16.8.8 Configuring a Customized VAS of an EPON Terminal (CFG-ONTVAINDIV).................................................2056
16.8.9 Configuring the EPON FTTB Service (CFG-PORTSVC).................................................................................. 2073
16.8.10 Adding CoS for Rate Limitation of an EPON ONT (ADD-ONTCOS)............................................................ 2079
16.8.11 Deleting CoS for Rate Limitation of an EPON ONT (DEL-ONTCOS)........................................................... 2083
16.8.12 Configuration for Querying User-Defined ONT Parameters (SYN-ONTXML).............................................. 2086
16.8.13 Configuring the WAN Port VLAN of an ONT (CFG-ONTVLAN)................................................................. 2088
16.8.14 Configuring the TR-069 Management Channel for an EPON ONT (CFG-EPONACSSERVERINFO)..........2091
16.8.15 Changing the Password for Logging In to the Local ONT Web Page (SET-ONTUSERINFO)....................... 2096
16.9 CNU Service Provisioning..................................................................................................................................... 2100
16.9.1 Adding a CNU (ADD-CNU)............................................................................................................................... 2100
16.9.2 Modifying a CNU (MOD-CNU)......................................................................................................................... 2104
16.9.3 Activating a CNU (ACT-CNU)........................................................................................................................... 2107
16.9.4 Deactivating a CNU (DACT-CNU).....................................................................................................................2110
16.9.5 Resetting a CNU (RESET-CNU).........................................................................................................................2113

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiv


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Contents

16.9.6 Deleting a CNU (DEL-CNU).............................................................................................................................. 2115


16.9.7 Modifying a UNI Port on a CNU (MOD-CNUPORT)........................................................................................2118
16.9.8 Configuring a CBAT UNI Port (CFG-CBATUNI)..............................................................................................2121
16.10 CM Service Provisioning......................................................................................................................................2124
16.10.1 Resetting or Deleting a CM (REBOOT-CM).................................................................................................... 2124
16.10.2 Starting a CMC Upstream Frequency Scan (START-CMC-FFT).....................................................................2126
16.10.3 Stopping a CMC Upstream Frequency Scan (STOP-CMC-FFT)..................................................................... 2129
16.10.4 Querying CMC Upstream Frequency Scan Data (LST-CMC-FFT)..................................................................2131
16.10.5 Creating a PNM Performance Monitoring Task (CRE-PNM-TSK)..................................................................2135
16.10.6 Deleting a PNM Performance Monitoring Task (DEL-PNM-TSK)..................................................................2141
16.10.7 Modifying a PNM Performance Monitoring Task (MOD-PNM-TSK).............................................................2143
16.11 VLAN Service Management................................................................................................................................ 2147
16.11.1 Adding a VLAN (ADD-VLAN)........................................................................................................................2148
16.11.2 Deleting a VLAN (DEL-VLAN).......................................................................................................................2155
16.11.3 Modifying a VLAN (MOD-VLAN).................................................................................................................. 2160
16.11.4 Associating an Ethernet Port with a VLAN (ASS-ETHPORTANDVLAN)..................................................... 2167
16.11.5 Disassociating an Ethernet Port from a VLAN (DASS-ETHPORTANDVLAN)............................................. 2172
16.11.6 Adding an IP Interface (ADD-IPINTERFACE)................................................................................................ 2176
16.11.7 Deleting an IP Interface (DEL-IPINTERFACE)............................................................................................... 2180
16.11.8 Adding an L3 Interface (ADD-VLANL3IF)..................................................................................................... 2183
16.11.9 Deleting an L3 Interface (DEL-VLANL3IF).................................................................................................... 2187
16.11.10 Activating an L3 Interface (ACT-VLANL3IF)............................................................................................... 2191
16.11.11 Deactivating an L3 Interface (DACT-VLANL3IF)......................................................................................... 2194
16.12 Ethernet Service Provisioning.............................................................................................................................. 2197
16.12.1 Configuring an Ethernet Port (MOD-ETHPORT).............................................................................................2197
16.12.2 Configuring the LACP Priority of an Ethernet Port (MOD-PORTLACP)........................................................2203
16.12.3 Activating an Ethernet Port (ACT-ETHPORT)................................................................................................. 2207
16.12.4 Deactivating an Ethernet Port (DACT-ETHPORT)...........................................................................................2211
16.12.5 Adding an Ethernet Aggregation Group (ADD-LAG)......................................................................................2215
16.12.6 Modifying an Ethernet Aggregation Group (MOD-LAG)................................................................................ 2222
16.12.7 Deleting an Ethernet Aggregation Group (DEL-LAG)..................................................................................... 2229
16.12.8 Associating Ports with an Ethernet Aggregation Group (ASS-LAG)............................................................... 2232
16.12.9 Disassociating Ports from an Ethernet Aggregation Group (DASS-LAG)....................................................... 2238
16.13 Service Virtual Port Provisioning......................................................................................................................... 2242
16.13.1 Modifying a Service Virtual Port (MOD-SERVICEPORT).............................................................................. 2242
16.13.2 Adding a Service Virtual Port (CRT-SERVICEPORT)..................................................................................... 2260
16.13.3 Deleting a Service Virtual Port (DEL-SERVICEPORT)...................................................................................2285
16.13.4 Binding an xDSL Channel to a Service Virtual Port (BIND-CHANNEL)....................................................... 2298
16.13.5 Activating a Service Virtual Port (ACT-SERVICEPORT)................................................................................2302
16.13.6 Deactivating a Service Virtual Port (DACT-SERVICEPORT)......................................................................... 2315
16.13.7 Adding a Static IP Address to a Service Virtual Port (ADD-IP2SERVICEPORT)...........................................2329
16.13.8 Deleting the Static IP Address of a Service Virtual Port (DEL-IP2SERVICEPORT)...................................... 2339

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xv


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Contents

16.13.9 Adding a CAR Group for Service Virtual Ports (ADD-CARGROUP).............................................................2350


16.13.10 Modifying a CAR Group for Service Virtual Ports (MOD-CARGROUP).....................................................2352
16.13.11 Adding a Member to a CAR Group (ADD-CARGROUPMEMBER)............................................................ 2355
16.13.12 Deleting a Member from a CAR Group (DEL-CARGROUPMEMBER)...................................................... 2364
16.13.13 Deleting a CAR Group for Service Virtual Ports (DEL-CARGROUP)..........................................................2373
16.13.14 Adding a Bundle for Service Virtual Ports (ADD-SERVICEPORTBUNDLE)..............................................2375
16.13.15 Deleting a Bundle of Service Virtual Ports (DEL-SERVICEPORTBUNDLE).............................................. 2378
16.14 PVC Service Provisioning.................................................................................................................................... 2380
16.14.1 Creating an ADSL-ATM PVC (CRT-ADSLATMPVC)....................................................................................2380
16.14.2 Creating an ADSL-LAN PVC (CRT-ADSLLANPVC).................................................................................... 2385
16.14.3 Creating an ADSL-CES PVC (CRT-ADSLCESPVC)...................................................................................... 2394
16.14.4 Deleting a PVC (DEL-PVC)............................................................................................................................. 2399
16.14.5 Creating a PVC (CRT-PVC).............................................................................................................................. 2404
16.14.6 Modifying a PVC (MOD-PVC)........................................................................................................................ 2409
16.14.7 Setting the Anti-DoS Attack Parameters (MOD-ANTIDOS)........................................................................... 2415
16.15 TDM E1 Service Provisioning............................................................................................................................. 2417
16.15.1 Creating a Local TDM E1 Connection (CRT-NATIVETDMCONN)............................................................... 2418
16.15.2 Deleting a Local TDM E1 Connection (DEL-NATIVETDMCONN).............................................................. 2422
16.15.3 Modifying the Attribute of a PRI E1 Port (MOD-PRIE1)................................................................................ 2425
16.16 Traffic Profile Management..................................................................................................................................2428
16.16.1 Creating an ATM Traffic Profile (CRT-TRAFFICPROFILE)...........................................................................2429
16.16.2 Deleting an ATM Traffic Profile (DEL-TRAFFICPROFILE).......................................................................... 2433
16.16.3 Creating an IP Traffic Profile (CRT-IPTRAFFICPROFILE)............................................................................ 2434
16.16.4 Deleting an IP Traffic Profile (DEL-IPTRAFFICPROFILE)........................................................................... 2437
16.16.5 Creating an MEF IP Traffic Profile (CRT-MEFIPTRAFFICPROFILE)...........................................................2439
16.16.6 Deleting an MEF IP Traffic Profile (DEL-MEFIPTRAFFICPROFILE).......................................................... 2443
16.17 PSTN Service Provisioning.................................................................................................................................. 2445
16.17.1 Adding a V5 PSTN User (ADD-V5PSTNUSER).............................................................................................2445
16.17.2 Modifying a V5 PSTN User (MOD-V5PSTNUSER)....................................................................................... 2449
16.17.3 Deleting a V5 PSTN User (DEL-V5PSTNUSER)............................................................................................2453
16.17.4 Blocking a V5 PSTN Port (BLK-V5PSTNPORT)............................................................................................2455
16.17.5 Unblocking a V5 PSTN Port (UBK-V5PSTNPORT)....................................................................................... 2458
16.17.6 Resetting a V5 PSTN Port (RST-V5PSTNPORT)............................................................................................ 2460
16.17.7 Looping Back a V5 PSTN Port (LBK-V5PSTNPORT)....................................................................................2462
16.17.8 Canceling the Loopback on a V5 PSTN Port (CLB-V5PSTNPORT)...............................................................2464
16.18 ISDN Service Provisioning.................................................................................................................................. 2467
16.18.1 Adding a V5 ISDN BRA User (ADD-V5BRAUSER)..................................................................................... 2467
16.18.2 Modifying a V5 ISDN BRA User (MOD-V5BRAUSER)................................................................................2469
16.18.3 Deleting a V5 ISDN BRA User (DEL-V5BRAUSER).....................................................................................2472
16.18.4 Blocking a V5 ISDN BRA Port (BLK-V5BRAPORT).....................................................................................2474
16.18.5 Unblocking a V5 ISDN BRA Port (UBK-V5BRAPORT)................................................................................ 2477
16.18.6 Resetting a V5 ISDN BRA Port (RST-V5BRAPORT)..................................................................................... 2479

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvi


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Contents

16.18.7 Looping Back a V5 ISDN BRA Port (LBK-V5BRAPORT)............................................................................ 2481


16.18.8 Canceling the Loopback on a V5 ISDN BRA Port (CLB-V5BRAPORT)....................................................... 2485
16.18.9 Adding a V5 ISDN PRA User (ADD-V5PRAUSER)...................................................................................... 2488
16.18.10 Modifying a V5 ISDN PRA User (MOD-V5PRAUSER)...............................................................................2490
16.18.11 Deleting a V5 ISDN PRA User (DEL-V5PRAUSER)....................................................................................2492
16.18.12 Blocking a V5 ISDN PRA Port (BLK-V5PRAPORT)................................................................................... 2494
16.18.13 Unblocking a V5 ISDN PRA Port (UBK-V5PRAPORT)...............................................................................2497
16.19 VoIP Service Provisioning....................................................................................................................................2499
16.19.1 Adding a VoIP PSTN User (ADD-VOIPPSTNUSER)..................................................................................... 2499
16.19.2 Modifying a VoIP PSTN User (MOD-VOIPPSTNUSER)............................................................................... 2523
16.19.3 Deleting a VoIP PSTN User (DEL-VOIPPSTNUSER).................................................................................... 2540
16.19.4 Enabling the VoIP PSTN Service (ACT-VOIPPSTNSERV).............................................................................2544
16.19.5 Configuring VoIP PSTN Service Rights and Service Data (CFG-VOIPPSTNSRV)........................................2548
16.19.6 Disabling a VoIP PSTN Service (DACT-VOIPPSTNSERV)............................................................................2554
16.19.7 Modifying a VoIP PSTN Port (MOD-VOIPPSTNPORT).................................................................................2559
16.19.8 Resetting a VoIP PSTN Port (RST-VOIPPSTNPORT)..................................................................................... 2561
16.19.9 Looping Back a VoIP PSTN Port (LBK-VOIPPSTNPORT)............................................................................ 2564
16.19.10 Canceling the Loopback on a VoIP PSTN Port (CLB-VOIPPSTNPORT)..................................................... 2567
16.19.11 Enabling the Automatic Gain of a VoIP PSTN Port (BAG-VOIPPSTNPORT)............................................. 2570
16.19.12 Configuring the Extended Telephone Number of a VoIP PSTN Port (CFG-VOIPPSTNEXTTELNO).........2573
16.19.13 Configuring the User Name and Password of a VoIP PSTN Port (CFG-VOIPPSTNACCOUNT)................2575
16.19.14 Adding a VoIP ISDN BRA User (ADD-VOIPBRAUSER)............................................................................ 2578
16.19.15 Modifying a VoIP ISDN BRA User (MOD-VOIPBRAUSER)...................................................................... 2590
16.19.16 Deleting a VoIP ISDN BRA User (DEL-VOIPBRAUSER)........................................................................... 2600
16.19.17 Enabling the VoIP ISDN BRA Service (ACT-VOIPBRASERV)................................................................... 2603
16.19.18 Configuring Service Rights for a VoIP ISDN BRA Port (CFG-VOIPBRASRV)...........................................2606
16.19.19 Configuring Authentication Information for VoIP ISDN BRA Ports (CFG-VOIPBRAACCOUNT)............2612
16.19.20 Disabling a VoIP ISDN BRA Service (DACT-VOIPBRASERV).................................................................. 2614
16.19.21 Resetting a VoIP ISDN BRA Port (RST-VOIPBRAPORT)............................................................................2618
16.19.22 Looping Back a VoIP ISDN BRA Port (LBK-VOIPBRAPORT)................................................................... 2620
16.19.23 Canceling the Loopback on a VoIP ISDN BRA Port (CLB-VOIPBRAPORT).............................................. 2624
16.19.24 Activating a VoIP ISDN BRA Port (ACT-VOIPBRAPORT)......................................................................... 2627
16.19.25 Deactivating a VoIP ISDN BRA Port (DACT-VOIPBRAPORT)...................................................................2630
16.19.26 Configuring the Extended Phone Number of a VoIP ISDN BRA Port (CFG-VOIPBRAEXTTELNO)........ 2632
16.19.27 Adding a VoIP ISDN PRA User (ADD-VOIPPRAUSER).............................................................................2634
16.19.28 Modifying a VoIP ISDN PRA User (MOD-VOIPPRAUSER)....................................................................... 2644
16.19.29 Deleting a VoIP ISDN PRA User (DEL-VOIPPRAUSER)............................................................................ 2655
16.19.30 Enabling the VoIP ISDN PRA Service (ACT-VOIPPRASERV).................................................................... 2657
16.19.31 Configuring Service Rights for a VoIP ISDN PRA Port (CFG-VOIPPRASRV)............................................2659
16.19.32 Configuring Authentication Information for VoIP ISDN PRA Accounts (CFG-VOIPPRAACCOUNT)......2662
16.19.33 Disabling the VoIP ISDN PRA Service (DACT-VOIPPRASERV)................................................................ 2665
16.19.34 Configuring the Extended Phone Number of a VoIP ISDN PRA Port (CFG-VOIPPRAEXTTELNO)......... 2668

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Contents

16.19.35 Adding a SIP User Group (ADD-USERGROUP).......................................................................................... 2670


16.19.36 Modifying a SIP User Group (MOD-USERGROUP).....................................................................................2674
16.19.37 Deleting a SIP User Group (DEL-USERGROUP)..........................................................................................2677
16.19.38 Adding an MGC Global Profile (ADD-MGCD)............................................................................................. 2679
16.19.39 Deleting an MGC Global Profile (DEL-MGCD)............................................................................................ 2682
16.19.40 Adding a VAG (ADD-VAG)............................................................................................................................2683
16.19.41 Modifying a VAG (MOD-VAG)......................................................................................................................2698
16.19.42 Deleting a VAG (DEL-VAG)...........................................................................................................................2703
16.19.43 Activating a VAG (ACT-VAG)........................................................................................................................2706
16.19.44 Deactivating a VAG (DACT-VAG)................................................................................................................. 2709
16.19.45 Associating an MGCD with a VAG (ASS-MGCDANDVAG)....................................................................... 2712
16.19.46 Disassociating an MGCD from a VAG (DASS-MGCDANDVAG)............................................................... 2715
16.19.47 Binding a VAG to a TID Profile (MOD-VAGTIDPROFILE).........................................................................2717
16.19.48 Modifying the H.248 Profile Bound to the VAG (MOD-VAGH248PROFILE)............................................. 2720
16.19.49 Adding a VSG (ADD-VSG)............................................................................................................................2721
16.19.50 Deleting a VSG (DEL-VSG)........................................................................................................................... 2724
16.19.51 Creating an Association (ADD-ASSOCIATION)........................................................................................... 2725
16.19.52 Deleting an Association (DEL-ASSOCIATION)............................................................................................2727
16.19.53 Adding a Hunting Group (ADD-HUNTINGGROUP)....................................................................................2729
16.19.54 Modifying a Hunting Group (MOD-HUNTINGGROUP).............................................................................. 2732
16.19.55 Deleting a Hunting Group (DEL-HUNTINGGROUP)...................................................................................2735
16.19.56 Adding a Hunting Group Member (ADD-HGMEMBER)..............................................................................2737
16.19.57 Modifying a Hunting Group Member (MOD-HGMEMBER)........................................................................ 2740
16.19.58 Deleting a Hunting Group Member (DEL-HGMEMBER)............................................................................. 2743
16.19.59 Adding a Group Account (ADD-GROUPNUMBER).................................................................................... 2745
16.19.60 Modifying a Group Account (MOD-GROUPNUMBER)...............................................................................2748
16.19.61 Activating a Group Account (ACT-GROUPNUMBER).................................................................................2750
16.19.62 Deactivating a Group Account (DACT-GROUPNUMBER).......................................................................... 2751
16.19.63 Deleting a Group Account (DEL-GROUPNUMBER)................................................................................... 2753
16.19.64 Configuring Service Rights and Service Data for Group Accounts (CFG-GROUPNUMBERSRV)............. 2755
16.19.65 Configuring Authentication Information for Group Accounts (CFG-GROUPNUMBERAUTH)................. 2759
16.19.66 Adding an CLI Account Group (ADD-CLIGROUP)......................................................................................2761
16.19.67 Deleting an CLI Account Group (DEL-CLIGROUP).....................................................................................2763
16.19.68 Adding a Member to an CLI Account Group (ADD-CGMEMBER)............................................................. 2765
16.19.69 Deleting a Member from an CLI Account Group (DEL-CGMEMBER)........................................................2767
16.19.70 Adding a Call Release Cause Code to a Hunting Group(ADD-HUNTINGSTOPCAUSECODE)................ 2769
16.19.71 Deleting a Call Release Cause Code from a Hunting Group (DEL-HUNTINGSTOPCAUSECODE)..........2770
16.19.72 Creating a Global Number Change Profile (CRT-NUMCHGPROFILE)....................................................... 2772
16.19.73 Deleting a Global Number Change Profile (DEL-NUMCHGPROFILE).......................................................2775
16.19.74 Setting VBD Parameters of Voice Ports (CFG-VOIPVBD)............................................................................2776
16.20 SPC Service Provisioning.....................................................................................................................................2779
16.20.1 Adding an SPC (ADD-SPC)..............................................................................................................................2779

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xviii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Contents

16.20.2 Modifying an SPC (MOD-SPC)........................................................................................................................2785


16.20.3 Deleting an SPC (DEL-SPC).............................................................................................................................2787
16.20.4 Setting Up an SPC (CON-SPC).........................................................................................................................2790
16.20.5 Releasing an SPC (DISCON-SPC)....................................................................................................................2793
16.21 ACL and QoS Management................................................................................................................................. 2796
16.21.1 Adding an ACL Group (ADD-ACLGRP).........................................................................................................2796
16.21.2 Deleting an ACL Group (DEL-ACLGRP)........................................................................................................ 2800
16.21.3 Adding a Subitem to an Extended ACL Group (ADD-ACLEXTSUBITEM).................................................. 2802
16.21.4 Deleting a Subitem from an Extended ACL Group (DEL-ACLEXTSUBITEM)............................................ 2808
16.21.5 Activating the Subitem of an Extended ACL Group (ACT-ACLEXTSUBITEM)...........................................2810
16.21.6 Deactivating the Subitem of an Extended ACL Group (DACT-ACLEXTSUBITEM).................................... 2812
16.21.7 Adding the QoS Priority (ADD-QOSPRIORITY)............................................................................................ 2814
16.21.8 Deleting the QoS Priority (DEL-QOSPRIORITY)........................................................................................... 2818
16.21.9 Adding a Subitem to a Standard ACL Group (ADD-ACLBASESUBITEM).................................................. 2822
16.21.10 Deleting the Subitem from a Standard ACL Group (DEL-ACLBASESUBITEM)........................................2825
16.21.11 Adding a Subitem to a Layer 2 ACL Group (ADD-ACLLINKSUBITEM)................................................... 2827
16.21.12 Deleting a Subitem from a Layer 2 ACL Group (DEL-ACLLINKSUBITEM)............................................. 2831
16.21.13 Setting a Traffic Limit on a Port (ADD-QOSTRAFFICLIMIT).....................................................................2833
16.21.14 Removing a Traffic Limit from a Port (DEL-QOSTRAFFICLIMIT)............................................................ 2837
16.21.15 Setting a Rate Limit on a Port (ADD-QOSRATELIMIT)...............................................................................2841
16.21.16 Removing a Rate Limit from a Port (DEL-QOSRATELIMIT)...................................................................... 2845
16.22 HQoS Management.............................................................................................................................................. 2848
16.22.1 Adding an HQoS User Group (CRT-HQOS).....................................................................................................2849
16.22.2 Modifying the Information About an HQoS User Group (MOD-HQOS)........................................................ 2851
16.22.3 Deleting an HQoS User Group (DEL-HQOS).................................................................................................. 2853
16.22.4 Add One HQoS User(ADD-HQOSUSER)....................................................................................................... 2855
16.22.5 Add One Member to the HQoS User(ADD-HQOSUSERMEMBER)............................................................. 2857

17 Performing the Diagnostic Test.......................................................................................... 2866


17.1 OAM Loopback Test (START-ATMOAMBYPVC).............................................................................................. 2867
17.2 Searching Tone Test (TST-SEARCHINGTONE).................................................................................................. 2871
17.3 Capturing the Test Bus (TST-CONNECT)............................................................................................................. 2874
17.4 Releasing the Test Bus (TST-DISCEXT)............................................................................................................... 2875
17.5 Callee Emulation Test (TST-CALLEDAUTORESP).............................................................................................2877
17.6 Call Emulation Test (TST-CALLERAUTODIAL)................................................................................................ 2879
17.7 Loop Line Test (TST-OUTSIDE)........................................................................................................................... 2881
17.8 MELT Test (TST-XDSLMELT)............................................................................................................................. 2897
17.9 Circuit Line Test (TST-POTSCIRCUIT)................................................................................................................2904
17.10 Setting Up a Line Test Session (CONN-LPACC-MET)...................................................................................... 2909
17.11 Capturing Circuits or Loop Lines (CHG-SPLIT-LILO).......................................................................................2913
17.12 Capturing the Test Bus (CHG-SPLIT)................................................................................................................. 2915
17.13 Monitoring the Test bus (CONN-MON).............................................................................................................. 2917
17.14 ETH OAM............................................................................................................................................................ 2919

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xix


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Contents

17.14.1 Adding an MD (ENT-ETHOAM-MD)..............................................................................................................2919


17.14.2 Deleting an MD (DLT-ETHOAM-MD)............................................................................................................ 2923
17.14.3 Querying an MD (RTRV-ETHOAM-MD)........................................................................................................ 2925
17.14.4 Adding an MA (ENT-ETHOAM-MA)..............................................................................................................2928
17.14.5 Modifying an MA (ED-ETHOAM-MA)...........................................................................................................2932
17.14.6 Deleting an MA (DLT-ETHOAM-MA)............................................................................................................ 2935
17.14.7 Querying an MA (RTRV-ETHOAM-MA)........................................................................................................ 2938
17.14.8 Adding an MEP (ENT-ETHOAM-MEP).......................................................................................................... 2942
17.14.9 Modifying an MEP (ED-ETHOAM-MEP)....................................................................................................... 2947
17.14.10 Deleting an MEP (DLT-ETHOAM-MEP).......................................................................................................2951
17.14.11 Querying an MEP (RTRV-ETHOAM-MEP)...................................................................................................2953
17.14.12 Enabling the Transmit of CC (Continuity Check) Packets (STA-ETHOAM-CCSEND)............................... 2958
17.14.13 Disabling the Transmit of CC Packets (STP-ETHOAM-CCSEND)...............................................................2961
17.14.14 Enabling the Receive of CC Packets (STA-ETHOAM-CCRECV)................................................................ 2963
17.14.15 Disabling the Receive of CC Packets (STP-ETHOAM-CCRECV)................................................................2966
17.14.16 Performing the Loopback Test (STA-ETHOAM-LB).....................................................................................2969
17.14.17 Querying the Bridge MAC Address of a Device (RTRV-ETHOAM-BRIDGEMAC)....................................2972

18 GPON FTTH Service Provision Example......................................................................... 2975


18.1 Overview of GPON FTTH Services.......................................................................................................................2976
18.2 GPON FTTH Service Provisioning........................................................................................................................ 2978
18.3 GPON FTTH Service Planning.............................................................................................................................. 2979
18.4 GPON FTTH Service Deployment.........................................................................................................................2985
18.5 GPON FTTH Service Provisioning Guide............................................................................................................. 2988
18.5.1 Preparing for GPON FTTH Service Provisioning...............................................................................................2988
18.5.2 Logging In to the U2000..................................................................................................................................... 2989
18.5.3 Internet Access Service....................................................................................................................................... 2989
18.5.3.1 Process of Managing an Internet Access Service............................................................................................. 2990
18.5.3.2 Internet Access Service Data Planning.............................................................................................................2995
18.5.3.3 Preconfiguring an Internet Access Service.......................................................................................................2998
18.5.3.4 Provisioning an Internet Access Service.......................................................................................................... 3000
18.5.3.5 Modifying Internet Access Service Parameters................................................................................................3003
18.5.3.6 Suspending an Internet Access Service............................................................................................................ 3003
18.5.3.7 Restoring an Internet Access Service............................................................................................................... 3004
18.5.3.8 Deleting an Internet Access Service................................................................................................................. 3004
18.5.3.9 Deregister an Internet Access User...................................................................................................................3005
18.5.3.10 Migrating an Internet Access Service.............................................................................................................3005
18.5.4 IPTV Service....................................................................................................................................................... 3006
18.5.4.1 Process of Managing an IPTV Service.............................................................................................................3006
18.5.4.2 IPTV Service Data Planning.............................................................................................................................3012
18.5.4.3 Preconfiguring an IPTV Service.......................................................................................................................3015
18.5.4.4 Provisioning an IPTV Service.......................................................................................................................... 3018
18.5.4.5 Modifying IPTV Service Parameters............................................................................................................... 3021

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xx


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Contents

18.5.4.6 Suspending an IPTV Service............................................................................................................................ 3022


18.5.4.7 Restoring an IPTV Service............................................................................................................................... 3022
18.5.4.8 Deleting an IPTV Service.................................................................................................................................3023
18.5.4.9 Deregistering an IPTV User............................................................................................................................. 3024
18.5.4.10 Migrating an IPTV Service.............................................................................................................................3024
18.5.5 VoIP Service........................................................................................................................................................ 3025
18.5.5.1 Process of Managing a VoIP Service................................................................................................................3025
18.5.5.2 VoIP Service Data Planning..............................................................................................................................3032
18.5.5.3 Preconfiguring a VoIP Service..........................................................................................................................3040
18.5.5.4 Provisioning a VoIP Service............................................................................................................................. 3046
18.5.5.5 Modifying VoIP Service Parameters................................................................................................................ 3050
18.5.5.6 Suspending a VoIP Service...............................................................................................................................3051
18.5.5.7 Restoring a VoIP Service.................................................................................................................................. 3052
18.5.5.8 Deleting a VoIP Service....................................................................................................................................3052
18.5.5.9 Deregistering a VoIP User................................................................................................................................ 3052
18.5.5.10 Migrating a VoIP Service................................................................................................................................3053
18.5.6 Logging Out of the U2000...................................................................................................................................3053

19 GPON FTTB/C Service Provision Example......................................................................3055


19.1 Overview of GPON FTTB/FTTC Services............................................................................................................ 3056
19.2 Overview of GPON FTTB/FTTC Service Provisioning........................................................................................ 3058
19.3 GPON FTTB/FTTC Service Planning................................................................................................................... 3059
19.4 GPON FTTB/FTTC Service Deployment.............................................................................................................. 3064
19.5 GPON FTTB/FTTC Service Provisioning............................................................................................................. 3065
19.5.1 Preparing for Service Provisioning......................................................................................................................3066
19.5.2 Logging In to the U2000..................................................................................................................................... 3066
19.5.3 Internet Access Service....................................................................................................................................... 3067
19.5.3.1 Process of Managing an Internet Access Service............................................................................................. 3067
19.5.3.2 Internet Access Service Data Planning.............................................................................................................3072
19.5.3.3 Preconfiguring an Internet Access Service.......................................................................................................3076
19.5.3.4 Provisioning an Internet Access Service.......................................................................................................... 3079
19.5.3.5 Modifying Internet Access Service Parameters................................................................................................3084
19.5.3.6 Suspending an Internet Access Service............................................................................................................ 3084
19.5.3.7 Restoring an Internet Access Service............................................................................................................... 3085
19.5.3.8 Deleting an Internet Access Service................................................................................................................. 3085
19.5.3.9 Deregistering an Internet Access Service User................................................................................................ 3086
19.5.3.10 Migrating an Internet Access Service.............................................................................................................3086
19.5.4 IPTV Service....................................................................................................................................................... 3087
19.5.4.1 Process of Managing an IPTV Service.............................................................................................................3087
19.5.4.2 IPTV Service Data Planning.............................................................................................................................3093
19.5.4.3 Preconfiguring an IPTV Service.......................................................................................................................3097
19.5.4.4 Provisioning an IPTV Service.......................................................................................................................... 3101
19.5.4.5 Modifying IPTV Service Parameters............................................................................................................... 3108

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxi


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Contents

19.5.4.6 Suspending an IPTV Service............................................................................................................................ 3109


19.5.4.7 Restoring an IPTV Service............................................................................................................................... 3109
19.5.4.8 Deleting an IPTV Service................................................................................................................................. 3110
19.5.4.9 Deregistering an IPTV User..............................................................................................................................3111
19.5.4.10 Migrating an IPTV Service.............................................................................................................................3111
19.5.5 VoIP Service.........................................................................................................................................................3111
19.5.5.1 Process of Managing a VoIP Service................................................................................................................ 3112
19.5.5.2 VoIP Service Data Planning..............................................................................................................................3116
19.5.5.3 Preconfiguring a VoIP Service..........................................................................................................................3120
19.5.5.4 Provisioning a VoIP Service............................................................................................................................. 3124
19.5.5.5 Modifying VoIP Service Parameters................................................................................................................ 3127
19.5.5.6 Suspending a VoIP Service...............................................................................................................................3128
19.5.5.7 Restoring a VoIP Service.................................................................................................................................. 3128
19.5.5.8 Deleting VoIP Services..................................................................................................................................... 3129
19.5.5.9 Migrating a VoIP Service..................................................................................................................................3129
19.5.6 Logging Out of the U2000...................................................................................................................................3130

20 DSLAM/MSAN Service Provision Example.................................................................... 3131


20.1 Overview of DSLAM/MSAN Services.................................................................................................................. 3132
20.2 DSLAM/MSAN Service Provisioning................................................................................................................... 3134
20.3 DSLAM/MSAN Service Plan................................................................................................................................ 3135
20.4 DSLAM/MSAN Service Deployment....................................................................................................................3139
20.5 DSLAM/MSAN Service Provisioning Guide........................................................................................................ 3140
20.5.1 Preparing for DSLAM/MSAN Services Provisioning........................................................................................ 3140
20.5.2 Logging In to the U2000..................................................................................................................................... 3141
20.5.3 Internet Access Service....................................................................................................................................... 3141
20.5.3.1 Process of Managing Internet Access Services................................................................................................ 3142
20.5.3.2 Data Plan for Internet Access Services.............................................................................................................3149
20.5.3.3 Preconfiguring an Internet Access Service.......................................................................................................3154
20.5.3.4 Provisioning an xDSL PPPoE Internet Access Service....................................................................................3157
20.5.3.5 Provisioning an xDSL PPPoA Internet Access Service................................................................................... 3160
20.5.3.6 Modifying Parameters for Internet Access Services........................................................................................ 3166
20.5.3.7 Suspending an Internet Access Service............................................................................................................ 3167
20.5.3.8 Restoring an Internet Access Service............................................................................................................... 3167
20.5.3.9 Deleting an Internet Access Service................................................................................................................. 3168
20.5.3.10 Deregistering an Internet Access Service User.............................................................................................. 3168
20.5.3.11 Migrating an Internet Access Service.............................................................................................................3169
20.5.4 IPTV Services......................................................................................................................................................3169
20.5.4.1 Process of Managing an IPTV Service.............................................................................................................3169
20.5.4.2 Data Plan for IPTV Services............................................................................................................................ 3175
20.5.4.3 Preconfiguring an IPTV Service.......................................................................................................................3180
20.5.4.4 Provisioning an IPTV Service.......................................................................................................................... 3183
20.5.4.5 Modifying IPTV Service Parameters............................................................................................................... 3189

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Contents

20.5.4.6 Suspending an IPTV Service............................................................................................................................ 3190


20.5.4.7 Restoring an IPTV Service............................................................................................................................... 3190
20.5.4.8 Deleting an IPTV Service.................................................................................................................................3191
20.5.4.9 Deregistering an IPTV Service User................................................................................................................ 3191
20.5.4.10 Migrating an IPTV Service.............................................................................................................................3192
20.5.5 VoIP Services.......................................................................................................................................................3192
20.5.5.1 Process of Managing VoIP Services................................................................................................................. 3193
20.5.5.2 Data Plan for VoIP Services............................................................................................................................. 3198
20.5.5.3 Preconfiguring a VoIP Service..........................................................................................................................3204
20.5.5.4 Provisioning a VoIP Service............................................................................................................................. 3208
20.5.5.5 Modifying VoIP Service Parameters................................................................................................................ 3209
20.5.5.6 Suspending a VoIP Service...............................................................................................................................3210
20.5.5.7 Restoring a VoIP Service.................................................................................................................................. 3210
20.5.5.8 Deregistering a VoIP User................................................................................................................................ 3211
20.5.5.9 Migrating a VoIP Service..................................................................................................................................3211
20.5.6 Triple Play Services............................................................................................................................................. 3212
20.5.6.1 Data Plan for Triple Play Services....................................................................................................................3213
20.5.6.2 Preconfiguring a Triple Play Service................................................................................................................3219
20.5.6.3 Provisioning a Triple Play Service................................................................................................................... 3223
20.5.7 Logging Out of the U2000...................................................................................................................................3227

21 List of Customized TL1 Commands.................................................................................. 3228


22 Troubleshooting Common Faults...................................................................................... 3248
22.1 Diagnosing a Failure to Issue TL1 Commands...................................................................................................... 3249
22.2 Failure for the OSS to Connect To the U2000........................................................................................................3253
22.3 No XML File Generated After TL1 Commands Are Run......................................................................................3255
22.4 Common Error Codes............................................................................................................................................. 3255
22.4.1 2686058516/2686058596.................................................................................................................................... 3256
22.4.2 2686058497/2686058499.................................................................................................................................... 3256
22.4.3 2686058508......................................................................................................................................................... 3256
22.4.4 2686058500......................................................................................................................................................... 3257
22.4.5 102690820/2689014791...................................................................................................................................... 3257
22.4.6 1615069195......................................................................................................................................................... 3257
22.4.7 1615462437......................................................................................................................................................... 3259
22.4.8 1610614842/1616445483/1616445484/1616445485.......................................................................................... 3260
22.4.9 2686058552......................................................................................................................................................... 3260
22.4.10 76546022........................................................................................................................................................... 3261
22.4.11 76546023........................................................................................................................................................... 3263
22.4.12 1610612765....................................................................................................................................................... 3264
22.4.13 15658136501/2686058531................................................................................................................................ 3265
22.4.14 2689008176....................................................................................................................................................... 3266
22.4.15 1615069206....................................................................................................................................................... 3267
22.4.16 2686058603....................................................................................................................................................... 3267

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxiii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Contents

22.4.17 2689023090....................................................................................................................................................... 3268


22.4.18 2689020327....................................................................................................................................................... 3268
22.4.19 2688880284....................................................................................................................................................... 3268
22.5 Collecting Fault Information.................................................................................................................................. 3269

23 FAQ.......................................................................................................................................... 3272
23.1 Session Connection.................................................................................................................................................3273
23.2 Interaction Between the OSS, U2000, and NE.......................................................................................................3273
23.3 User Control........................................................................................................................................................... 3274
23.4 Database Upgrade...................................................................................................................................................3274
23.5 TL1 Command Performance.................................................................................................................................. 3275
23.6 Identifying a Device by Using the Device Name Instead of the Device ID...........................................................3275
23.7 How to Locate a Device According to the IP Address...........................................................................................3275
23.8 Certain Port Status Defined Inconsistently in the TL1 Specifications and the Client............................................3277
23.9 Virtual Subslot........................................................................................................................................................ 3277
23.10 Global TL1 Character Encoding...........................................................................................................................3278
23.11 Recording TL1 User Logs.................................................................................................................................... 3278
23.12 How to Modify the Format of the Returned SN................................................................................................... 3279
23.13 How to Set the IP Address Listening Range........................................................................................................ 3281
23.14 Which Characters Are Supported by String-Type Parameters?........................................................................... 3281

24 Command Parameter Reference......................................................................................... 3283


24.1 Parameters Related to the Device Type.................................................................................................................. 3284
24.2 Parameters Related To the Board Type...................................................................................................................3286
24.3 Parameter Values for Adding a Board in the Case of Different Devices................................................................3286
24.4 Parameters Related To the Port Type......................................................................................................................3287
24.5 Parameters Related To the Port Status....................................................................................................................3292
24.6 Parameters Related To the ADSL Working Mode..................................................................................................3294
24.7 Mapping Between FTTH ONU Types and ASCII Codes...................................................................................... 3294
24.8 Mapping Between FTTO&FTTD ONU Types and ASCII Codes......................................................................... 3318
24.9 Mapping Between FTTH ONU Types and Function of Configuring the VAS...................................................... 3320
24.10 Mapping Between FTTO&FTTD ONU Types and Function of Configuring the VAS....................................... 3343
24.11 Parameters Related To the Range of VLAN IDs for Different Devices...............................................................3345
24.12 Parameters Related To the PVC Connection Type............................................................................................... 3346
24.13 Parameters Related To the Traffic Profile............................................................................................................ 3349
24.14 Parameters Related To the Voice Gain................................................................................................................. 3354
24.15 Parameters Related To the Valid Values of Level.................................................................................................3355

25 Acronyms and Abbreviations............................................................................................. 3356

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xxiv


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 1 About This Document

1 About This Document

Related Version
The following table lists the product version related to this document.

Product Name Version

iManager U2000 V200R016C60

Intended Audience
This document provides the commands and examples related to the TL1 NBI based on
inventory management and services of the iManager U2000. In addition, this document
provides typical examples for service provisioning, troubleshooting, and FAQ.

This document describes how to install and run the TL1 NBI and provides the commands and
examples for session control and operations performed to devices, notification of resource
changes, inventory management, and service provisioning and maintenance. In addition, this
document describes the examples for provisioning services related to the GPON FTTH,
GPON FTTB, DSLAM/MSAN and provides troubleshooting and FAQ.

This document is intended for:

l Application developers
l Data configuration engineers

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation


which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 1 About This Document

Symbol Description

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation


which, if not avoided, could result in death
or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation


which, if not avoided, may result in minor
or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation


which, if not avoided, could result in
equipment damage, data loss, performance
deterioration, or unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not
related to personal injury.

Calls attention to important information,


best practices and tips.
NOTE is used to address information not
related to personal injury, equipment
damage, and environment deterioration.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 1 About This Document

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles


are in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"


signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Change History
For details about the change history, see 2 Change History.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 2 Change History

2 Change History

This topic lists the change history of the document.


Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue
contains all updates made in previous issues.

Changes in Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Based on Product Version V200R016C60SPC200


The second commercial release has the following updates:

Topic Section Description Cause and Impact

15.11.13 Querying Command Format The parameter Whether to match


Amplifier Details Input Parameter MATCHNAMEBY the NAME
(LST- DIGIT is added. parameter by
AMPDETAIL) amplifier ID.

15.8.17 Querying Output Parameter The parameter You can query the
the Ethernet Example TXMAXRATE and maximum TX/RX
Transmission RXMAXRATE are rate.
Feature of an added.
Upstream Port of
an ONT (LST-
ONTETHPORTPE
RF)

16.7.27 Modifying The parameter You can configure


the User Port of an Command Syntax TXPOWERADJUS the RF output power
ONT (MOD- Input Parameter TMENT is added. adjustment of ONT.
ONTPORT)

16.22.4 Add One ALL This topic is added. You can add HQoS
HQoS User(ADD- User.
HQOSUSER)

16.22.5 Add One ALL This topic is added. You can add one
Member to the member to the
HQoS User(ADD- HQoS user.
HQOSUSERMEM
BER)

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 2 Change History

Topic Section Description Cause and Impact

16.3.1 Activating a Supporting Device The MA5818 is The MA5818


VDSL2 Port (ACT- added to Supporting supports this
VDSL2PORT) Device. command.
16.3.2 Deactivating
a VDSL2 Port
(DACT-
VDSL2PORT)
16.3.3 Modifying
the Attributes of a
VDSL2 Port
(MOD-
VDSL2PORT)
16.3.4 Modifying
the Attributes of a
VDSL2 Port
Through the
Enhanced
Command (MOD-
VDSL2PORTEX)
15.4.1 Querying the
Details of a VDSL2
Port (LST-
VDSL2PORTDET
AILINFO)
15.4.2 Querying
Specified
Information About
VDSL2 Ports (LST-
VDSL2PORTSPE
CIFYINFO)
15.4.3 Querying
VDSL2 Port
Information about
Specified NEs
(LST-
NEVDSL2PORTD
ETAILINFO)
15.4.4 Querying the
Alarm Information
About a VDSL2
Port (LST-
VDSLPORTALAR
M)
15.4.5 Querying the
Performance
Statistics on a
VDSL2 Port (LST-
VDSLPORTPERF)

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 2 Change History

Topic Section Description Cause and Impact

15.4.6 Querying a
VDSL2 Line
Profile (LST-
VDSLLINEPROFI
LE)
15.4.7 Query the
Details of a VDSL2
Line Profile (LST-
VDSLLINEPROFI
LEDETAIL)
15.4.8 Querying a
VDSL2 Alarm
Profile (LST-
VDSLALARMPR
OFILE)
15.4.9 Query the
Details of a VDSL2
Alarm Profile
(LST-
VDSLALARMPR
OFILEDETAIL)
15.4.11 Querying
Bit Allocation
Information About
a VDSL2 Port
(LST-
VDSL2BITALLOC
INFO)

Changes in Issue 01 (2016-10-25) Based on Product Version V200R016C60


Initial commercial release. Compared with V200R016C50, the first commercial release has
the following updates:
Topic Sectio Description Cause and Impact
n

24.8 Mapping Table Add ONU type. The MA5671-G4 of ONU


Between 24-8 type is supported.
FTTO&FTTD
ONU Types and
ASCII Codes

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 2 Change History

Topic Sectio Description Cause and Impact


n

24.10 Mapping Table


Between 24-10
FTTO&FTTD
ONU Types and
Function of
Configuring the
VAS

24.7 Mapping Table Add ONU type. The HS8245W, HS8145V,


Between FTTH 24-7 HS8546V, HS8145C,
ONU Types and HS8125T and HG8145C-f
ASCII Codes of ONU type are supported.

24.9 Mapping Table


Between FTTH 24-9
ONU Types and
Function of
Configuring the
VAS

15.13.7 Querying Comma The parameter You can use the


the DDM Details nd SHOWOPTION is added. SHOWOPTION
of an Optical Format parameter to control the
Module (LST- Input returned 10G PON transmit
DDMDETAILIN Paramet optical power and 10G
FO) er PON bias current.
15.8.32 Querying
Respon
the GPON
se
Optical Module
Format
Information
(LST- Output
GPONDDMINF Paramet
O) er

15.8.14 Querying Output The description of the 10G GPON represents the
the Details of Paramet TYPE parameter is added. XG-GPON type which is
GPON Optical er defined in the TIU-T
Modules (LST- standard.
GPONSFP)

15.8.14 Querying The values are added for the The new subtypes of the
the Details of SUBTYPE parameter. optical module are added.
GPON Optical
Modules (LST- The values are added for the The new types of the
Output
GPONSFP) TYPE parameter. optical module are added.
Paramet
15.9.10 Querying er
Details on EPON
Optical Modules
(LST-EPONSFP)

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 2 Change History

Topic Sectio Description Cause and Impact


n

15.9.2 Querying The value 10G-2G is added The value of the upstream
the List of EPON for the and downstream rate type
ONTs (LST- BINDWIDTHTYPE of an ONT is added.
EPONONT) parameter.
16.8.1 Adding an
Input
EPON ONT
Paramet
(ADD-
er
EPONONT)
16.8.2 Modifying
an EPON ONT
(MOD-
EPONONT)

15.9.4 Querying The value 10G-2G is added The value of the upstream
the Running for the and downstream rate type
Output
Status of an ONT ONUACTUALBANDTYP of an ONT is added.
Paramet
(LST- E and ONUBANDTYPE
er
EPONONTRUNI parameters.
NFO)

16.12.5 Adding The value MPLSLabel, The values of the


an Ethernet SrcDstIP and aggregation mode are
Aggregation AGGREGATEMODE are added.
Group (ADD- added for the
LAG) AGGRMODE parameter.
16.12.6
Modifying an
Ethernet Input
Aggregation Paramet
Group (MOD- er
LAG)
16.12.8
Associating Ports
with an Ethernet
Aggregation
Group (ASS-
LAG)

15.13.2 Querying The value MPLSLabel, The values of the


an Ethernet SrcDstIP and aggregation mode are
Output
Aggregation AGGREGATEMODE are added.
Paramet
Group (LST- added for the
er
LAG) AGGREGATEMODE
parameter.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 2 Change History

Topic Sectio Description Cause and Impact


n

21 List of List of The customized TL1 You can export the service
Customized TL1 Custom commands DMP- port statistics of GPON
Commands ized ONTSERVICEINFO is ONT to files.
TL1 added.
Comma
nds

21 List of List of The customized TL1 You can Check the


Customized TL1 Custom commands TST-ATM- Connectivity of an ATM
Commands ized PING is added. Link.
TL1
Comma
nds

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 3 Usage Note

3 Usage Note

This topic describes the usage note of TL1 commands.


To use the TL1 NBI properly, ensure that:
l You have logged in to the U2000 using LOGIN command.
l The ENDESC parameter (that is, the returned error description) in the response
information may be optimized in later versions. Therefore, you are not advised to set the
ENDESC parameter as the keyword for OSS matching.
l You have selected the Access domain check box in the Domain area when installing the
U2000.
l You have purchased the desired license. For details, see 5 Relationships Between the
License and TL1 NBI.
l You have logged in to the U2000 through TL1 NBI 9819. The SSL authentication mode
is used by default. If you want to modify the authentication mode, see 4.5 Security
Mechanism.
l The system monitor client process TL1NBiDm and related service processes are running
properly.
l TL1 users exist on the U2000 and have been assigned with the required rights. You can
create TL1 users in the NMS user management window or use the existing users on the
U2000 client.
NOTE

The default user name is admin(in the case of centralized deployment) or ssoadmin (in the case of
distributed deployment). Both users' initial passwords are Changeme_123 . The password must be
changed during the first login to ensure system security. Keep the password confidential and change it
regularly.
l You have set configuration items by running the specific TL1 commands.
l You have synchronized data on the U2000 before issuing TL1 commands to keep data
consistency between the U2000 and NEs. If the data is inconsistent, the commands may
fail to be issued.
l You have learned about 4.6 Performance Specifications and 11 Command Format of
the TL1 NBI.
l You have commissioned TL1 commands before interconnecting the U2000 with the
OSS. Run the telnet U2000 server IP address 9819 command in the CLI, or log in to a
more secure SSL client tool and enter the U2000 server IP address and port 9819 to
connect to the U2000 TL1 NBI. Then run TL1 commands to test command correctness.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 3 Usage Note

l The U2000 V200R015C50 supports the same TL1 commands for the MD5500,
MA5651G, MA5300, MA5100V1, MA5100V2, MA5105, MA5605, MA5615, UA5000
and UA5000(PVU) as the U2000 V200R014C60 does. For details, see iManager U2000
V200R014C60 Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide.
l You must properly run TL1 commands that are used only for internal commissioning or
customized scenarios. Otherwise, commands may fail to be issued or services become
abnormal. The commands used for internal commissioning or customized scenarios will
not be provided in this document. If you need them, apply for them from Huawei.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 4 TL1 NBI Overview

4 TL1 NBI Overview

About This Chapter

This topic provides an introduction to the transaction language 1 (TL1) northbound interface
(NBI), including its position in the network, communication protocols, functions, security
mechanisms, performance specifications, and standard compliance of TL1 NBI.

4.1 Introduction to the TL1 NBI


This topic briefly describes the TL1 NBI.
4.2 Position in the Network
This topic describes the position of the TL1 NBI in the network.
4.3 Communication Protocols
This topic describes the communication protocols that the TL1 NBI uses.
4.4 Functions and Features
This topic describes the functions and features that the TL1 NBI supports.
4.5 Security Mechanism
This topic describes the security mechanism that the TL1 NBI uses.
4.6 Performance Specifications
This topic describes the performance specifications that the TL1 NBI supports.
4.7 Standard Compliance
This topic describes the standard that the TL1 NBI complies with.
4.8 References
This topic provides the references for this user guide.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 4 TL1 NBI Overview

4.1 Introduction to the TL1 NBI


This topic briefly describes the TL1 NBI.

The TL1 NBI is used to interconnect the element management system (EMS) with the
operation support system (OSS) or with the network management system (NMS) The TL1
NBI supports the functions of resource query, provisioning, and diagnostic tests of the ADSL,
video, and VoIP services through the OSS or NMS.

4.2 Position in the Network


This topic describes the position of the TL1 NBI in the network.

Figure 4-1 shows the position of the TL1 NBI in the network.

Figure 4-1 Position of the TL1 NBI in the network

The functions of the entities are as follows:


l OSS/NMS refers to the operation support system or network management system of
carriers. The OSS or NMS issues TL1 commands to the U2000 for automatic service
provisioning.
l TL1 NBI for Service Provisioning provides an interface between the OSS/NMS and the
U2000. In this way, the OSS/NMS can perform multi-service provisioning and resource
querying operations.
l U2000 is unified network management system (NMS) developed by Huawei. It supports
all functions of the element and network management layers and providing NBIs.
l Network element (NE) refers to the element device in the network. It is managed by the
U2000.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 4 TL1 NBI Overview

4.3 Communication Protocols


This topic describes the communication protocols that the TL1 NBI uses.
The access network adapter interacts with the EMS through the TL1 commands based on the
SSL/TCP/IP-based socket. The EMS, as a server, provides an available SSL/TCP SOCKET
interface, and accepts the request from the OSS to set up a session through the default port
number 9819. After the session is set up, you can access the system after the login
authentication.
Figure 4-2shows the protocol stack for the TL1 NBI.

Figure 4-2 Protocol stack for the TL1 NBI

l OSS: operation support system


l NMS: network management system
l SSL: Secure Sockets Layer
l TCP/IP: Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol

4.4 Functions and Features


This topic describes the functions and features that the TL1 NBI supports.

Functions
The TL1 NBI supports the following functions:
l Resource change notification: The TL1 NBI supports the function of notifying changes
of devices, EPON resources, and Ethernet resources.
l Inventory query: The TL1 NBI supports the function of querying various resources, such
as devices, xDSL resources (including ADSL, G.SHDSL, and VDSL2 resources), video
resources, xPON resources (including GPON and EPON resources), and VoIP resources.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 14


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 4 TL1 NBI Overview

l Service provisioning and management: The TL1 NBI supports the function of
provisioning and maintaining various types of services, such as the xDSL services
(including ADSL, G.SHDSL, and VDSL2 services), video service, xPON service
(including GPON and EPON services), and VoIP service.
l Diagnostic test: The TL1 NBI supports the function of performing the diagnostic test,
such as the OAM loopback test and ETH OAM function.

Features
Successful issue of TL1 commands can change NMS configurations. No negative impact is
introduced after a rollback upon failure to run the TL1 commands. Combining different
parameters, TL1 commands can implement various complex functions. The OSS system can
use functions of the TL1 NBI by calling interfaces that are developed based on the TL1
standards.
A session (through port 9819) needs to be set up between the U2000 and the OSS before the
OSS can issue any TL1 command. Then, by using the login command, the OSS can log in to
the U2000 successfully after passing the authentication. During the interaction, the OSS and
the U2000 set handles for each command. Generally, the OSS system issues the next
command only after receiving the response to the previous command from the U2000. The
command response, right or wrong, wraps up the processing of a command. If the OSS logs
out but does not terminate the session, the U2000 terminates the session after ten-minute-
period of no commands.
The TL1 NBI supports concurrent client operations. Multiple clients can communicate with
the server to issue commands through the TL1 NBI at the same time.

4.5 Security Mechanism


This topic describes the security mechanism that the TL1 NBI uses.
By default, the TL1 NBI uses the security mechanism of the EMS. To activate this
mechanism, you need to add NBI users and configure the access control list (ACL) on the
EMS server.
To enable the OSS to log in to the U2000 without being restricted by the ACL, perform the
following operations:
1. Modify the configuration item in the oss\server\etc\oss_cfg\access\TL1NBiDm.conf
file.
Specifically, change the configuration item dynamic NICMWriterTask Service_Object *
bmsniconnectionmanage:_make_CNICMWriterTask() "-port 9819 -poolsize 16 -idletime
600 -returnerr 1" in the oss\server\etc\oss_cfg\access\TL1NBiDm.conf file to dynamic
NICMWriterTask Service_Object *
bmsniconnectionmanage:_make_CNICMWriterTask() "-port 9819 -poolsize 16 -
idletime 600 -returnerr 1 -enableACL 1".
2. On the System Monitor client, restart the TL1NBiDm process for the configuration to
take effect.
a. Log in to the System Monitor client.
b. In the system monitor client window, click the Service Monistor tab.
c. Right-click the TL1NBiDm process and choose Stop the Service from the shortcut
menu.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 4 TL1 NBI Overview

d. After the TL1NBiDm process stops, right-click it and choose Start the Service
from the shortcut menu.
The EMS system supports up to 30 concurrent connections.
The security mechanism of the TL1 NBI is as follows:
l Login authentication: After connecting to the TL1 NBI, the OSS sends the LOGIN
command for login authentication. The TL1 NBI accepts the command on the
connection only after the authentication succeeds. The user name and password for login
are the same as those of the U2000 client. User rights depend on the U2000 user rights
and TL1 license.
NOTE

The default user name is admin(in the case of centralized deployment) or ssoadmin (in the case of
distributed deployment). Both users' initial passwords are Changeme_123 . The password must be
changed during the first login to ensure system security. Keep the password confidential and change it
regularly.

NOTICE
You are advised to create an independent TL1 NBI user with both query and configure
operation rights. This prevents errors caused by insufficient permissions during the
process of service provisioning. You can also assign either query or configure operation
rights to a user according to actual situations.

l Operation and domain authentication: The U2000 provides operation rights and domain
rights for access users. Only users that have related operation rights can invoke the TL1
NBI. For details, see 7.7 Creating a U2000 User for the Access of an OSS and Assign
Rights to the User.
l Automatic release of the connection: If no message is transmitted through a connection
within 10 minutes, the connection will be released automatically.
l IP address listening range: By default, messages sent from all IP addresses are listened.
To ensure security, you can configure settings to only listen to messages sent from
specified IP addresses. For details, see 23.13 How to Set the IP Address Listening
Range.
l Communication protocol: The U2000 TL1 NBI provides SSL and TCP connections. The
U2000 uses the SSL authentication mode by default to connect to the OSS to ensure their
communication security.
NOTE

l SSL is more secure and widely used and has better performance than TCP. Therefore, SSL is
recommended during protocol configuration. For details about SSL, see 8 SSL Principle and
Configuration.
l Only the TLSv1.1 and later protocol is supported when you connect with SSL.
Perform the following operations to query and change the connection mode:
a. Run the select CfgValue from BMSDB..bms_cfg_tab where
strLocateName='AN.NBFRAME' and CfgName = 'PROTOCOL' script to
query the current connection mode.
n If CfgValue is displayed as 2 (default value), the SSL protocol is used.
n If CfgValue is displayed as 0, the TCP protocol is used.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 16


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 4 TL1 NBI Overview

b. Run a database script to change the value of CfgValue to the desired protocol.
n SSL: update BMSDB..bms_cfg_tab set CfgValue='2' where
strLocateName='AN.NBFRAME' and CfgName='PROTOCOL'
n TCP: update BMSDB..bms_cfg_tab set CfgValue='0' where
strLocateName='AN.NBFRAME' and CfgName='PROTOCOL'
c. On the System Monitor client, restart the TL1NBiDm process for the configuration
to take effect.
i. Log in to the System Monitor client.
ii. In the system monitor client window, click the Service Monistor tab.
iii. Right-click the TL1NBiDm process and choose Stop the Service from the
shortcut menu.
iv. After the TL1NBiDm process stops, right-click it and choose Start the
Service from the shortcut menu.
l Limited number of IP connections: The TL1 NBI limits the number of TCP connections
established with a single IP address. Connections will be denied after the limit is
reached. The restriction can be controlled by setting the configuration item
TL1_MAX_IP_CONNECTION.
l IP address blacklist: If the number of failed login attempts of an IP address exceeds the
limit in a specified duration, the U2000 will prohibit the IP address from establishing
connections in a set duration. The restriction can be controlled by setting configuration
items: NBIFRAME_LOGIN_FAIL_COUNT_INTERVAL,
NBIFRAME_MAX_ALLOWED_LOGIN_FAILS, and
NBIFRAME_MAX_BLOCK_TIME.

4.6 Performance Specifications


This topic describes the performance specifications that the TL1 NBI supports.
Table 4-1 lists the performance specifications of the TL1 NBI.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 17


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 4 TL1 NBI Overview

Table 4-1 Performance specifications of the TL1 NBI


Item Specification

Maximum. number of OSS l Small- and medium-scale networks: 20


connections that can be received at It is recommended that the number of OSS
one time connections of each function interface be
allocated as follows:
– Service provisioning: 15
– Inventory query: 2
– Diagnosis and test: 3
l Large- and ultra-large-scale networks: 30
It is recommended that the number of OSS
connections of each function interface be
allocated as follows:
– Service provisioning: 20
– Inventory query: 2
– Diagnosis and test: 8
NOTE
For details about the mapping between the network scale
and server configurations, see iManager U2000 Product
Description.

Processing capability for 10 per second (only for configuration commands)


requesting commands of TL1

Response time for requesting Within two minutes (excluding test commands)
commands of TL1

4.7 Standard Compliance


This topic describes the standard that the TL1 NBI complies with.
The TL1 NBI complies with the Generic Requirements (GR) 831 standard.

4.8 References
This topic provides the references for this user guide.
User Requirement Specification of Interface Between C & W HKT CFMS and NMSI of AN
Vendor
Operations Application Messages - Language for Operations Application Messages(GR831)

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 18


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 5 Relationships Between the License and TL1 NBI

5 Relationships Between the License and TL1


NBI

This topic describes the relationships between the license and the TL1 NBI.
The U2000 license controls the TL1 NBI software in the interface function dimensions.
l Inventory.
l Service delivery.
Use the text viewer to view the contents of the license file (.dat file) in the oss\server\etc\conf
\license\ directory. On Solaris and Linux, view the license as user root. On Windows, view the
license as user administrator.
To use the service provisioning and inventory querying functions of the TL1 NBI, apply for
related licenses. Refer to Table 5-1 for the details of license control items. The parameters
Feature means the feature group.

Table 5-1 License control items


License Control Item Function Description Abbreviati Value
on

Service Per PON This item defines the LNSDNELC 0-8000000


Provisioning Terminal number of ONUs that R86
Resource support PON service
License for provisioning. Each PON
NBI-TL1 terminal consumes the
Service license item by 1.
Provisioning- The TL1 command to
Access provision services on PON
Network terminals can be run only
when the license count of
this item is greater than 1.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 19


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 5 Relationships Between the License and TL1 NBI

License Control Item Function Description Abbreviati Value


on

Per This item defines the total LNSDPENE 0-8000000


Broadband number of ADSL ports, C29
Port License VDSL ports, SHDSL ports,
for NBI-TL1 Ethernet ports, and P2P
Service access resources that
Provisioning- support broadband service
Access provisioning. Each
Network broadband port consumes
the license item by 1.
The TL1 command to
provision broadband
services can be run only
when the license count of
this item or the item
Compatible license for TL1
service provisioning NBI
— access is greater than 1.

Per This item defines the total LNSDPENE 0-8000000


Narrowband number of POTS ports, C22
Port License PRA ports, BRA ports, and
for NBI-TL1 E1 ports that support
Service narrowband service
Provisioning- provisioning. Each
Access narrowband port consumes
Network the license item by 1.
The TL1 command to
provision narrowband
services can be run only
when the license count of
this item or the item
Compatible License for
TL1 Service Provisioning
NBI-Access Network is
greater than 1

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 20


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 5 Relationships Between the License and TL1 NBI

License Control Item Function Description Abbreviati Value


on

Compatible This item defines the total LNSDNELC 0-8000000


License for number of ADSL ports, R77
TL1 Service VDSL ports, SHDSL ports,
Provisioning Ethernet ports, P2P access
NBI-Access ports, POTS ports, PRA
Network ports, BRA ports, and E1
ports that support service
provisioning. Each
broadband or narrowband
port consumes the license
item by 1.
The TL1 command to
provision broadband
services can be run only
when the license count of
this item or the item
Compatible license for TL1
service provisioning NBI
— access is greater than 1.
The TL1 command to
provision narrowband
services can be run only
when the license count of
this item or the item
Compatible License for
TL1 Service Provisioning
NBI-Access Network is
greater than 1

Inventory Per PON This item defines the LNSDNELC 0-8000000


Querying Terminal number of ONUs that R87
Resource support PON inventory
License for query. Each PON terminal
NBI-TL1 consumes the license item
Inventory- by 1.
Access The TL1 command to
Network query PON terminals can
be run only when the
license count of this item is
greater than 1.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 21


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 5 Relationships Between the License and TL1 NBI

License Control Item Function Description Abbreviati Value


on

Per This item defines the total LNSDPENE 0-8000000


Broadband number of ADSL ports, C27
Port License VDSL ports, SHDSL ports,
for NBI-TL1 Ethernet ports, and P2P
Inventory- access resources that
Access support query of broadband
Network inventory. Each broadband
port consumes the license
item by 1.
The TL1 command to
query broadband resources
can be run only when the
license count of this item or
the item Compatible
license for TL1 inventory
NBI — access is greater
than 1.

Per This item defines the total LNSDPENE 0-8000000


Narrowband number of POTS ports, C09
Port License PRA ports, BRA ports, and
for NBI-TL1 E1 ports that support query
Inventory- of narrowband inventory.
Access Each narrowband port
Network consumes the license item
by 1.
The TL1 command to
query narrowband
resources can be run only
when the license count of
this item or the item
Compatible License for
TL1 Inventory NBI-
Access Network is greater
than 1.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 22


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 5 Relationships Between the License and TL1 NBI

License Control Item Function Description Abbreviati Value


on

Compatible This item defines the total LNSDNELC 0-8000000


License for number of ADSL ports, R78
TL1 VDSL ports, SHDSL ports,
Inventory Ethernet ports, P2P access
NBI-Access ports, POTS ports, PRA
Network ports, BRA ports, and E1
ports that support inventory
query. Each broadband or
narrowband port consumes
the license item by 1.
The TL1 command to
query broadband resources
can be run only when the
license count of this item or
the item Compatible
license for TL1 inventory
NBI — access is greater
than 1.
The TL1 command to
query narrowband
resources can be run only
when the license count of
this item or the item
Compatible License for
TL1 Inventory NBI-
Access Network is greater
than 1.

Per D-CCAP This item defines the LNSDPENE 0-8000000


NE License number of MA5633s that C49
for NBI-TL1 support D-CCAP inventory
Inventory- query. Each MA5633
Access extended subrack or
Network MA5633 NE consumes the
license item by 1.

NOTE

l ONTs consume license items for PON terminals only and do not consume license items for their
broadband and narrowband ports.
l MDUs consume license items for their broadband and narrowband ports only and do not consume license
items for PON terminals.
l The license expires when it is exhausted. In that event, related TL1 commands cannot be executed.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 23


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 6 Installing and Enabling the NBI for Provisioning the TL1
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Service

6 Installing and Enabling the NBI for


Provisioning the TL1 Service

About This Chapter

This topic describes how to install and enable the NBI for provisioning the TL1 service on
Windows OS and Solaris/Linux OS.

6.1 Configuration Requirements


Because the U2000 TL1 NBI and the U2000 server run on the same PC or Sun workstation,
no additional configuration is required. However, to enable the TL1 NBI, you must purchase
the license for the corresponding functions.
6.2 Installing a TL1 NBI Component
This topic describes how to install a TL1 NBI component.
6.3 Checking the Status of the TL1 NBI
This topic describes how to check the status of the TL1 process and the license for the TL1
NBI after a TL1 NBI component is installed.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 24


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 6 Installing and Enabling the NBI for Provisioning the TL1
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Service

6.1 Configuration Requirements


Because the U2000 TL1 NBI and the U2000 server run on the same PC or Sun workstation,
no additional configuration is required. However, to enable the TL1 NBI, you must purchase
the license for the corresponding functions.

NOTE

For different U2000 system , the configuration requirements of U2000 are different, refer to the
corresponding iManager U2000 Software Installation and Commissioning Guide for more information.

Hardware Configuration
In practice, the U2000 TL1 interface and the U2000 server run on the same PC or SUN
workstation. The hardware is configured to ensure the proper installation and running of the
U2000 server. Any additional hardware configuration is not required the U2000 TL1
interface.

For details of hardware requirements of U2000 Server, refer to section "Configuration


Requirements" in the iManager U2000 Software Installation and Commissioning Guide.

Software Configuration
Since the TL1 interface is integrated into the U2000 installation software, no additional
software configuration is required for the installation of the U2000 TL1 interface.

For details of software requirements U2000 Server, refer to section "Configuration


Requirements" in the iManager U2000 Software Installation and Commissioning Guide.

License
The U2000 controls the functions and available resources of the TL1 NBI through a license. If
you want to enable the TL1 interface, you need to purchase the U2000 license. Ensure the
license support TL1 interface function before deploying the TL1 NBI.

For details, see 5 Relationships Between the License and TL1 NBI. If the license does not
support the functions or resources needed, contact Huawei engineers to apply for the license.
For the license introduction and information on how to apply for a license, see section
Applying for and Updating the U2000 License in the iManager U2000 Administrator Guide.

6.2 Installing a TL1 NBI Component


This topic describes how to install a TL1 NBI component.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the installation program of the U2000 and select to install Access domain .
For details on the installation steps, see the iManager U2000 Software Installation and
Commissioning Guide.

----End

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 25


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 6 Installing and Enabling the NBI for Provisioning the TL1
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Service

6.3 Checking the Status of the TL1 NBI


This topic describes how to check the status of the TL1 process and the license for the TL1
NBI after a TL1 NBI component is installed.

Prerequisites
After the U2000 is installed, the OS is restarted and the U2000 service is started.
NOTE
If the U2000 service is not started, start the U2000 service manually.
l Run the oss\server\platform\bin\startnms.bat file on Windows OS.
l Run the following command on Solaris\Linux OS:
$ cd /opt/oss/server/platform/bin
$ ./startnms.sh

Context
In a U2000 HA system, check the status of the TL1 process at the primary site. Check
whether the license is effective at the primary and secondary sites.

Procedure
Step 1 Check the status of the TL1 process.
1. Log in to the system monitor client.
2. On the Service Monistor tab page, check whether the TL1NBiDm process is running.
NOTE
If the process is not started, right-click TL1NBiDm and choose Start the Service from the shortcut
menu.

Step 2 Check whether the license for the TL1 NBI is effective.
1. Log in to the client.
2. Choose Help > License Management > License Information (traditional style) from
the main menu or select System Management in Application Center and choose
License Management > Licenes Information (application style) from the main menu.
3. In the License Information dialog box, click Resource Control Item. In the Resource
column, check whether the applied license items are included and the Capacity counts
are consistent with the number that you apply for.

----End

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 26


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 7 Maintaining the TL1 NBI

7 Maintaining the TL1 NBI

About This Chapter

This chapter provides instructional suggestions for the maintenance conditions and routine
operations for the TL1 interface. This chapter also describes the basic operation for
maintaining the TL1 interface. In addition, this chapter describes how to solve problems that
may occur during maintenance, which can help maintenance personnel to solve problems
quickly.

7.1 Requirements for Maintenance Staff


This section describes the requirements for maintenance staff.
7.2 Routine Maintenance
By routine maintenance, faults such as malfunction in the system operation can be detected in
time if countermeasures are properly adopted to handle the problem. In this way, hidden
troubles are cleared to prevent accidents from happening. It is recommended that you perform
routine maintenance once a week.
7.3 Logging in to the System Monitor Client
This topic describes how to log in to the System Monitor client that runs on Windows, Solaris,
or Linux OS.
7.4 Starting the TL1 Process
This topic describes how to start the TL1 process in the Stopped state using the System
Monitor client.
7.5 Stopping the TL1 Process
This topic describes how to stop the TL1 process using the System Monitor client.
7.6 Checking the License Status of the U2000
This topic describes how to check the license status of the U2000. By learning the license
usage, you can apply for a new license from Huawei in time when the NMS requires an
expansion or the license is about to expire.
7.7 Creating a U2000 User for the Access of an OSS and Assign Rights to the User
If the U2000 TL1 interface runs in the normal state and the network communication is
normal, you need to create a network management user on the U2000 for the access of an
OSS before the OSS accesses the U2000 through the TL1 interface.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 27


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 7 Maintaining the TL1 NBI

7.1 Requirements for Maintenance Staff


This section describes the requirements for maintenance staff.
To guarantee the smooth maintenance and rapid problem solving, the maintenance staffis
required to have the following experiences:
l Be familiar with the basic operations of the PC, Sun workstation, Windows, Solaris and
Linux operating systems.
l Have a good understanding of the TL1 technology.
l Understand concepts of the telecommunication management network (TMN) and know
the basic networking architecture of the U2000 well.
l Be familiar with the configuration and the operations of enabling and disabling the
U2000 TL1 interface.
NOTE

For maintenance of the workstation, refer to the maintenance manual provided by its supplier.

7.2 Routine Maintenance


By routine maintenance, faults such as malfunction in the system operation can be detected in
time if countermeasures are properly adopted to handle the problem. In this way, hidden
troubles are cleared to prevent accidents from happening. It is recommended that you perform
routine maintenance once a week.

Checking the TL1 Service


l When the U2000 single server is running, log in to the System Monitor client which
monitors the U2000 process. Check whether the TL1NBiDm processes is running
properly.
l In a U2000 HA system, log in to the System Monitor client at the primary site and check
the running status of the TL1NBiDm process.
NOTE

Primary site: Used for the high availability system, the primary site refers to the physical primary site.
Whether a site is a primary site or a secondary site is specified when it is installed, the role does not
change when the system switching occurs. In most of the time, a primary site is in the active state,
whereas a secondary site is in the standby state for protecting the primary site.

Backing up the logs of the U2000 TL1 NBI


By default, the logging function of the TL1 NBI is disabled. The TL1 user operations are not
recorded in logs. To enable the logging function of the TL1, refer to 23.11 Recording TL1
User Logs.
The log information of the U2000 TL1 NBI is as follows:
l server/var/logs/Develop/TL1NBiDm/TL1NBiDm_%y%m%d_%H%M%S.*
l server/var/logs/Develop/TL1NBiDm/BootLog_%y%m%d_%H%M%S.*
l server/var/logs/mrblog/iMAPBase_p47_%y%m%d_%H%M%S.*
l server/var/logs/mrblog/iMAPMrb_p2_%y%m%d_%H%M%S.*

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 28


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 7 Maintaining the TL1 NBI

Back up the log files regularly in case they occupy too much of the system disk space. The log
files record the running information of the U2000 TL1 NBI and the operation performed by
the NMS/OSS through the U2000 TL1 NBI. If an error occurs when the U2000 TL1 NBI is
running, you can refer to the log files to do the troubleshooting. If you want to back up the log
information of the U2000 TL1 NBI, manually copy the log information to a specified
directory.
Alternatively, choose Administration > Log Management > Query Operation Logs
(traditional style) from the main menu or select Security Management in Application
Center and choose Log Management > Query Operation Logs (application style) from the
main menu. In the Query Operation Logs window, select the required log to view the
operation result and details.

Dumping operation logs of the U2000 TL1 NBI


Dump the log files regularly in case they occupy too much of the system disk space.
l Manually dump in the U2000 client.
a. Choose Administration > Task Schedule > Task Management (traditional style)
from the main menu or select System Management in Application Center and
choose Task Schedule > Task Management (application style) from the main
menu.
b. In the Task Management window, choose Manual Dump > Operation Log
Manual Dump from the navigation tree.
c. In the right pane, right-click the manual dump task and choose Run from the
shortcut menu.
d. In the Run dialog box, set the parameters.
e. Click Dump to dump logs.
l Setting the log overflow dump in the U2000 client.
a. Choose Administration > Task Schedule > Task Management (traditional style)
from the main menu or select System Management in Application Center and
choose Task Schedule > Task Management (application style) from the main
menu.
b. In the Task Management window, choose Overflow Dump > Operation Log
Overflow Dump from the navigation tree.
c. Double-click the task in the right pane.
d. In the Attributes dialog box, set the parameters on the Common Parameters and
Extended Parameters tabs.
e. Click OK.

7.3 Logging in to the System Monitor Client


This topic describes how to log in to the System Monitor client that runs on Windows, Solaris,
or Linux OS.

Prerequisites
l The U2000 server runs in the normal state.
l The system, which monitoring process, runs in the normal state.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 29


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 7 Maintaining the TL1 NBI

l The System Monitor communicates well with the U2000 server.


l You have a valid user account and password of the U2000.

Context
l The default port number of the server is 31080. Do not change it in normal conditions.
Otherwise, you cannot log in to the U2000 server.
l The login modes include the SSL mode and the common mode. In SSL mode, data is
encrypted when being transmitted between the client and the server. In common mode,
data is not encrypted during transmission. To ensure the security of data transmission,
you are recommended to use the Security (SSL) mode.
l The port used for login in common mode is different from that in SSL mode. The port
number is 31030 in common mode, and 31080 in SSL mode.
l By default, if you do not log in to the U2000 system monitor client for more than 60
days, your account automatically turns to the suspend state except that you are an admin
user(in the case of centralized deployment) or ssoadmin users (in the case of distributed
deployment).
l If you never use an account for login after creating it, the U2000 does not suspend or
delete the account.

Procedure
Step 1 Start the system monitor client.
l On Windows OS, to start the system monitor client, double-click the related shortcut
icon on the desktop.
l On Solaris or Linux OS, log in to the operating system of the server as the ossuser user.
Run the following command to start the system monitor client.
$ cd /opt/oss/client
$ ./startup_sysmonitor_global.sh

Step 2 In the Login dialog box, select a server from the Server drop-down list.

If the list does not contain a server, perform the following steps:

1. Click on the right of the Server drop-down list.


2. In the Server List dialog box, click Add.
3. In the Add Server Information dialog box, specify Name and Server Name(or IP
Address), and then select a login mode. Click OK.
4. In the Server List dialog box, click OK.

Step 3 In the Login dialog box, enter the user name and password.

The user name and password are the same as those for the U2000 client.
NOTE

The default user name is admin(in the case of centralized deployment) or ssoadmin (in the case of
distributed deployment). Both users' initial passwords are Changeme_123 . The password must be
changed during the first login to ensure system security. Keep the password confidential and change it
regularly.

Step 4 Click Login.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 30


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 7 Maintaining the TL1 NBI

l If you attempt to connect to the server in a non-SSL mode, the client displays a dialog
box indicating security risks.
– If you want to continue the connection, click Yes. If you do not want the client to
display the dialog box again upon subsequent logins, select Do not remind me
next time.
NOTE

The IP address of the server being connected is saved to the SysComServer.dat file in
Client installation directory\client\plugins\loginui\style\conf\loginui. Therefore, the Do
not remind me next time settings apply only to the connected server. If you want the client
to display the dialog box that indicates the security risks upon subsequent logins, delete the
SysComServer.dat file.
– If you want to terminate the connection, click No. The Login dialog box is
displayed. You can select the matched communication mode.
l If the client does not trust the server, you need to determine whether the server is
trustworthy using the server certificate.
– If you confirm that the server is trustworthy, click Yes and log in to the client. If you
do not want the system to display the dialog box again, contact the system
administrator to configure a trust certificate.
– If you confirm that the server is untrustworthy, click No to return to the Login
dialog box and contact the system administrator to process the issue.

----End

7.4 Starting the TL1 Process


This topic describes how to start the TL1 process in the Stopped state using the System
Monitor client.

Prerequisites
l The U2000 server runs in the normal state.
l The system, which monitoring process, runs in the normal state.
l The System Monitor communicates well with the U2000 server.
l You have a valid user account and password of the U2000.
l The TL1NBiDm process is in the Stopped state.

Context
In a U2000 HA system, start the TL1 process at the primary site.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the system monitor client.

Step 2 In the system monitor client window, click the Service Monistor tab.

Step 3 Right-click the TL1NBiDm process and choose Start the Service from the shortcut menu.

----End

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 31


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 7 Maintaining the TL1 NBI

7.5 Stopping the TL1 Process


This topic describes how to stop the TL1 process using the System Monitor client.

Prerequisites
l The U2000 server runs in the normal state.
l The system, which monitoring process, runs in the normal state.
l The System Monitor communicates well with the U2000 server.
l You have a valid user account and password of the U2000.
l The TL1NBiDm process is in the Running state.

Context
l For a U2000 HA system, stop the TL1 process at the primary site.
l If Startup Mode is set to Automatic, the TL1 process is started with the startup of the
U2000.
l If Startup Mode is set to Manual, the TL1 process is not started with the startup of the
U2000.

NOTICE
Stopping a service affects the functions of the TL1 NBI. Therefore, perform this operation
with caution.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the system monitor client.

Step 2 In the system monitor client window, click the Service Monistor tab.

Step 3 Select TL1NBiDm process, right-click, and then choose Stop the Service from the shortcut
menu.

----End

7.6 Checking the License Status of the U2000


This topic describes how to check the license status of the U2000. By learning the license
usage, you can apply for a new license from Huawei in time when the NMS requires an
expansion or the license is about to expire.

Context
For details on the license item for the TL1 connection, see 5 Relationships Between the
License and TL1 NBI.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 32


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 7 Maintaining the TL1 NBI

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the U2000 client.

Step 2 Choose Help > License Management > License Information (traditional style) from the
main menu or select System Management in Application Center and choose License
Management > Licenes Information (application style) from the main menu.

Step 3 In the License Information dialog box, click Resource Control Item to view the license
usage.
NOTE
When the number of resources exceeds the licensed capacity, the corresponding license item is displayed in
red. This affects the license renewal. Specifically, the newly applied license count must be greater than the
number consumed. Otherwise, the license renewal fails. For details on how to apply for a license, see the
section "Applying for and Updating the U2000 License" of the iManager U2000 Administrator Guide.

Step 4 (Optional) Click Export License to save the license information to files in *.xls, *.csv, *.txt,
*.html, *.pdf, or *.xlsx format.

----End

7.7 Creating a U2000 User for the Access of an OSS and


Assign Rights to the User
If the U2000 TL1 interface runs in the normal state and the network communication is
normal, you need to create a network management user on the U2000 for the access of an
OSS before the OSS accesses the U2000 through the TL1 interface.

Context

NOTICE
To ensure system security, when the OSS accesses the U2000 through the NBI, the U2000
will authenticate user logins. The U2000 provides operation rights and domain rights for
access users. Only users that have related operation rights can invoke the TL1 NBI.

For more details about the NMS user management, see the online help of U2000.

Procedure
Step 1 Login the client of U2000.

Step 2 Choose Administration > NMS Security > NMS User Management (traditional style) from
the main menu or select Security Management in Application Center and choose OSS
Security > OSS User Management (application style) from the main menu.

Step 3 In the NMS User Management navigation tree, right-click the User node and choose New
User from the shortcut menu.

Step 4 In the New User dialog box, set the properties of the new user.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 33


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 7 Maintaining the TL1 NBI

The user name and password must be set. For the other properties, you can use default values
or set them after you create the user account successfully.
If the OSS access U2000 by TL1 NBI, some user attributes are valid, as the following table
shown.

Attribute Description Operations

Normal properties The OSS use the user name On the New User dialog
or password access U2000 box, set user properties,
by TL1 NBI. such as user name,
description content, and
password.

Domain For the user that access 1. ClickMore Setting, on


U2000 by TL1 NBI can the Setting dialog box,
manage the equipment in the choose Domain tab
domain only. page, click Select.
2. In the Select Domain
dialog box, set the
management domain of
the user.

Operation Rights l TL1 Query Operation 1. ClickMore Setting, on


Set: TL1 NBI query the Setting dialog box,
rights (including choose Operation
performing diagnostic Rights tab page, click
test and notifying Select.
resource change) 2. In the Select Operation
l TL1 Configure Rights dialog box, set
Operation Set: TL1 NBI the Authorization
configuration rights Objects to Network
Management
Application, select the
operation rights of the
user in the Operations
panel.

Access control list (ACL) You cannot access U2000 if ClickMore Setting, on the
the IP is not in the access Setting dialog box, choose
control list. ACL tab page, set the ACL
for the user.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 34


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 7 Maintaining the TL1 NBI

NOTICE
To ensure system security, password must be complex enough. Remember to change
passwords regularly.
The password must meet the following requirements to safeguard your user account.
1. It is a character string consisting of 8 to 16 characters.
2. It contains at least four types of the following characters:
– Lowercase letter: a-z
– Uppercase letter: A-Z
– Digit: 0-9
– Special character: ` ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) - _ = + \ | [ { } ] ; : ' " , < . > / ? or space.

Step 5 In the New User dialog box, click OK. The user account is created.

----End

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 35


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 8 SSL Principle and Configuration

8 SSL Principle and Configuration

About This Chapter

The SSL encryption mechanism is used to ensure the security of the messages transmitted
between the U2000 and the OSS.

8.1 SSL Principle


This section describes the principle of SSL.
8.2 Applying for an SSL Certificate
The U2000 provides a default SSL certificate for encryption and authentication. It is
recommended that customers replace the default certificate with their own security certificate.
Customers can apply for another SSL certificate from a third party that authorizes and issues
SSL certificates. After the TL1 northbound interface (NBI) is configured to work in SSL
mode, the OSS must communicate with the U2000 TL1 NBI in SSL mode, that is, the
certificate, digital signature, encryption algorithm, or other manners must be used to ensure
the communication security.
8.3 Configuring an SSL Certificate
The U2000 provides a default SSL certificate for encryption and authentication. It is
recommended that customers replace the default certificate with their own security certificate.
Specifically, the customer can apply for a security certificate from a trusted CA and then use
the certificate to replace the original U2000 SSL certificate.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 36


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 8 SSL Principle and Configuration

8.1 SSL Principle


This section describes the principle of SSL.

The Security Socket Layer (SSL) is a type of security communication protocol developed by
Netscape. By using the digital certificate, the SSL enables an encrypted security channel to be
set up between the client and the server. This ensures that the transmitted information is not
intercepted by others.

After adopting the SSL encryption mechanism, the client needs to set up the communication
connection to the server first. The server sends the digital certificate and the public key to the
client, and exchanges the password with the client. Usually, the RSA password algorithm is
used. The Diffie-Hellman or Fortezza-KEA password algorithm can also be used. After the
identity is verified, the public key is used to encrypt the session key of the client and the
session key is sent to the server. After the server receives the session key, the server decrypts
the session key. Then, an encrypted communication channel is set up between the client and
the server.

The three crucial elements of SSL are certificate, digital signature, and encryption. For details
about the concepts and principles of SSL, refer to the related documents.

8.2 Applying for an SSL Certificate


The U2000 provides a default SSL certificate for encryption and authentication. It is
recommended that customers replace the default certificate with their own security certificate.
Customers can apply for another SSL certificate from a third party that authorizes and issues
SSL certificates. After the TL1 northbound interface (NBI) is configured to work in SSL
mode, the OSS must communicate with the U2000 TL1 NBI in SSL mode, that is, the
certificate, digital signature, encryption algorithm, or other manners must be used to ensure
the communication security.

Default SSL Certificate Provided By the U2000


Table 8-1 shows the TL1 NBI certificates and paths.

Table 8-1 SSL certificate and path

Certificate Description Path

server.p12 Server server/etc/ssl/access/keyStore/PFX


identity
certificate.
The file is in
the encoding
format of
PKCS12 and
includes the
private key
and identity
certificate.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 37


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 8 SSL Principle and Configuration

Certificate Description Path

client.p12 Client server/etc/ssl/access/keyStore/PFX


identity
certificate.
The file is in
the encoding
format of
PKCS12 and
includes the
private key
and identity
certificate.

trust.cer Trust server/etc/ssl/access/trust/PEM


certificate

Applying for an SSL Certificate


When you apply for an SSL certificate from a third party that authorizes and issues SSL
certificates, the desired SSL certificate of the U2000 must meet the requirements listed in
Table 8-2 because the U2000 TL1 NBI uses the PEM encoding format. An SSL certificate
has multiple encoding formats. You are advised to apply for an SSL certificate in proper
encoding format based on the OSS type, so that you do not need to convert the certificate
format.

NOTICE
Use the default SSL certificate provided by the U2000 if security requirement is not high.
Otherwise, apply for an SSL certificate from a third-party security institute.

Table 8-2 Requirements for SSL certificates of the U2000 TL1 NBI
Certificate Type Requirement

Server identity l The file encoding format is PFX.


certificate l The RSA asymmetric encryption algorithm is used.
l The private key contains a minimum of 1024 bits.

Client identity l The file encoding format is PFX.


certificate l The RSA asymmetric encryption algorithm is used.
l The private key contains a minimum of 1024 bits.

Trust certificate The file encoding format is PEM.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 38


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 8 SSL Principle and Configuration

NOTICE
l The U2000 uses its own SSL certificate by default. It does not generate, sign a signature
for, or convert a special SSL certificate for a specified site. For a special SSL certificate,
you are advised to prepare it by yourself or purchase it from a third party that authorizes
and issues the SSL certificate. Replace the default SSL certificate on the U2000 with a
special certificate after converting it to a format supported by the U2000.
l If the default certificate on the U2000 is used, the OSS needs to convert it to a format
supported by the OSS. If you need technical support and have purchased associated
integration support service, contact the local Huawei customer service center.

8.3 Configuring an SSL Certificate


The U2000 provides a default SSL certificate for encryption and authentication. It is
recommended that customers replace the default certificate with their own security certificate.
Specifically, the customer can apply for a security certificate from a trusted CA and then use
the certificate to replace the original U2000 SSL certificate.

Prerequisites
l The Centralized Maintenance Management Tool server has been started.
l Port 31945 on the Centralized Maintenance Management Tool server has been enabled.
l The PC used to log in to the Centralized Maintenance Management Tool in web mode
can properly communicate with the Centralized Maintenance Management Tool server.
l The primary IS node has been configured to communicate with the primary and
secondary Float IP and NBI GW nodes and the PM, Backup, NM, and EM nodes.

You have obtained one or more of the following files based on actual needs:
l Identity certificate (*.p12)
l Trust certificate (*.cer)
l CRL (*.crl)

Context
The TL1 NBI supports P12 identity certificates and PEM trust certificates only.

The default certificate and its directory are as follows.

Table 8-3 SSL certificate and path

Certificate Description Path

server.p12 Server identity certificate. server/etc/ssl/access/keyStore/PFX


The file is in the encoding
format of PKCS12 and
includes the private key and
device certificate.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 39


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 8 SSL Principle and Configuration

Certificate Description Path

trust.cer Trust certificate used to server/etc/ssl/access/trust/PEM


identify trusted access
objects.

NOTE

The new identity certificate is automatically changed to server.p12 and stored in the preceding directory to
replace the original certificate.

Procedure
l Centralized deployment
a. Upload the certificates in binary mode to the following directories of the U2000
server:
n Windows: %IMAP_ROOT%\certs
n Solaris or Linux: Upload the certificate to $IMAP_ROOT/certs as the
ossuser user.
b. Use the MSuite to log in to the U2000 server.
c. On the MSuite, choose Certificate File Management > TL1 Certificate to open
the Certificate Configuration dialog box.
n Replacing an identity certificate
1) Click the PrivateIdentityPanel tab, select the certificate file to be
replaced from the File Name drop-down list, and click Replace.
2) In the dialog box that is displayed, enter the passwords for the old and
new certificates and click OK.
NOTE

To ensure system security, the password for the new certificate must meet the
following complexity requirements.
To keep the password and system secure, the password must meet the following
requirements:
1. Contain 8 to 18 characters.
2. Contain at least three of the following combinations:
l Lowercase letter
l Uppercase letter
l Digit
l Special characters =~@#^*-_+[{}]:./?
n Adding a trust certificate
1) Click the Trust Certificate tab, select the certificate file to be added from
the File Name drop-down list, and click Add.
n Deleting a trust certificate
1) Click the Trust Certificate tab, right-click the trust certificate to be
deleted in the certificate list, and choose Delete from the shortcut menu.
n Configuring a CRL

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 40


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 8 SSL Principle and Configuration

1) Click the CRL tab, select the CRL to be used from the File Name drop-
down list, and click Update.
d. Restart the TL1 service for the configurations to take effect.
n End the TL1 NBI service and then start the TL1 NBI service.
l Distributed deployment
a. Upload the certificates to the $IMAP_ROOT/certs directory of the IS server.
NOTE

The owner of these certificates must be ossuser:ossgroup.


The certificate permission must be set to 600.
b. Log in to the MSuite client.
n Start the web browser, enter https://Primary IS node's IP address:31945,
and click Enter.
NOTE

Internet Explorer 9/10/11, Google Chrome 29, and Firefox 12.0 or higher are recommended. The
recommended resolution is 1280 x 768 or higher.
If a message about a security certificate issue is displayed during the HTTPS access, ignore the
message and continue the browsing.
n On the login page, set User Name and Password of the user and click Log In.
NOTE

The default user name is admin.


The initial password of the admin user is Changeme_123. If the U2000 is preinstalled before
being delivered, the password has been changed to Admin_123. To ensure system security,
change the password promptly, update it periodically, and save it properly.
If you log in for the first time, the system requires you to change the password and displays a
message indicating that product information has not been configured.
c. Choose System > Certificate Management > TL1 Certificate to open the
certificate configuration page.
n Replacing an identity certificate
1) Click the Identity Certificate tab, and select the certificate file to be
replaced from the File Name drop-down list.
2) Enter the passwords of the old and new certificates in the Old Certificate
Password and New Certificate Password text boxes, and click OK.
NOTE

To ensure system security, the password for the new certificate must meet complexity
requirements.
To keep the password and system secure, the password must meet the following
requirements:
1. Contain 8 to 18 characters.
2. Contain at least three of the following combinations:
l Lowercase letter
l Uppercase letter
l Digit
l Special characters =~@#^*-_+[{}]:./?
n Adding a trust certificate

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 41


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 8 SSL Principle and Configuration

1) Click the Trust Certificate tab, select the certificate file to be added from
the File Name drop-down list, and click OK.
n Deleting a trust certificate
1) Click the Trust Certificate tab, and click Delete in the fifth column of
the certificate list.
n Configuring a CRL
1) Click the CRL tab, select the CRL file to be used from the File Name
drop-down list, and click OK.
d. Restart the TL1 service for the configurations to take effect.
n End the TL1 gateway service and start the TL1 gateway service by following
10.3 Maintaining the TL1 NBI Gateway Service.
----End

Result
After certificate replacement, the original certificate is stored in %IMAP_ROOT%/var/
backup/deployssl/ssl/access/YYYY_MM_DD_HH_MM_SS.
YYYY_MM_DD_HH_MM_SS indicates the timestamp.
l YYYY: year
l MM: month
l DD: day
l HH: hour
l MM: minute
l SS: second

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 42


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 9 Setting Configuration Items

9 Setting Configuration Items

This topic describes how to set configuration items before running TL1 commands.
The configuration items described in this topic are applicable to both the centralized and
distributed systems. For particular configuration items applicable to the distributed system,
see 10.4 Setting Configuration Items.
l Virtualization configuration items
Before running TL1 commands, set configuration items listed in Table 9-1 based on
actual needs.
a. Log in to the MSuite client. For details, see Starting the Process of the MSuite
Server and Logging In to the MSuite Client in section MSuite of iManager
U2000 V200R016C60 Administrator Guide.
b. Choose Tools > Config Manager from the main menu.
c. Modify the configuration item values in an appropriate manner based on actual
needs.
n Setting configuration items one by one.
1) Click Filter in the upper right corner. In the dialog box that is displayed,
set Config Name by following Table 9-1 and click OK.
2) Double-click the configuration item to be modified in the list. In the
dialog box that is displayed, set Config Value and click OK.
n Setting configuration items in batches by importing a configuration item table.
1) Obtain a configuration item table from the U2000 installation directory.
Because only the Windows OS supports Excel, obtain the table from the
specified Windows-based U2000 installation directory (X:\oss\client
\client\Config_Item_Import\en\Config_Item_Import.xls, where X
indicates the U2000 installation directory).
2) Double-click the blank configuration item table, set values for the desired
configuration items by following Table 9-1, and save the table.
NOTE

Only tables in .xls format are supported.


The configuration item data must be stored in the Config item data sheet of the table.
Do not add or delete sheets.
The first line of the table is a title line where stored data cannot be read. The
configuration data must be stored consecutively.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 43


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 9 Setting Configuration Items

3) Verify that the entered information in the table is correct and click
Import in the upper right corner. In the dialog box that is displayed,
select the desired configuration item table and click Open.
4) In the Configuration Item Batch Import dialog box, verify that all
configuration items in the table are correct.
5) Click OK. In the prompt dialog box that is displayed, click OK.
d. Log in to the System Monitor client and restart the related processes by following
Table 9-1.

Table 9-1 Configuration item description


Configur Config Description De Re Restar Remarks
ation uratio fa co ting
Item n Item ult m Proces
Value Va me ses
lu nd
e ed
Va
lu
e

DEVMEA 0 Indicates that in 0 1 TL1N For details, see


N the TL commands BiDm 23.7 How to
NOTE except for the Locate a Device
This notification of According to the
configurat resource changes, IP Address.
ion item is the DEV
supported
parameter is used
only by
the to locate a device
centralize according to the
d system. device name.
For the
DevMean 1 Indicates that in
configurat the TL commands
ion item except for the
in the notification of
distribute
d system,
resource changes,
see 10.4 the DEV
Setting parameter is used
Configur to locate a device
ation according to the IP
Items. address.

BMSNB_ 0 Indicates that in 0 1 BmsAc


MSGNOT the notification of cess_*
IFY_DEV resource changes, process
MEAN the DEV (multip
parameter is used le
to locate a device instanc
according to the es
device name. involvi
ng
multipl

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 44


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 9 Setting Configuration Items

Configur Config Description De Re Restar Remarks


ation uratio fa co ting
Item n Item ult m Proces
Value Va me ses
lu nd
e ed
Va
lu
e

1 Indicates that in e
the notification of process
resource changes, es)
the DEV
parameter is used
to locate a device
according to the IP
address.

TL1_ONT 12 Indicates that the 16 12 BmsAc Command


_SN_LEN returned SN is in cess_* involved by the
GTH the format of 12- process configuration
byte character (multip item: LST-ONT
string. le
instanc
16 Indicates that the es
returned SN is in involvi
the format of 16- ng
byte character multipl
string. e
process
es)
TL1N
BiDm
inTL1
NBiD
m

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 45


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 9 Setting Configuration Items

Configur Config Description De Re Restar Remarks


ation uratio fa co ting
Item n Item ult m Proces
Value Va me ses
lu nd
e ed
Va
lu
e

TL1_SN_ ONU Specifies the - -


LEN_SPE type. format of the SN
CIAL_ON The returned by some
UTYPE value GPON ONU types
depend in the exported
s on the resource file. To
EQUIP set the SN format
MENT returned by some
ID ONU types to be
returne different from that
d by the returned by all
LST- other ONU types
ONT and defined in the
comma TL1_ONT_SN_L
nd. Use ENGTH
comma parameter, set this
s (,) to parameter. For
separat example, if
e TL1_ONT_SN_L
multipl ENGTH is set to
e ONU 16, it indicates that
types, the returned SN is
for in the format of
exampl 16-byte character
e, string. However,
HG824 the HG8240A
0A,HG needs to support
8245A. an SN in the
format of 12-byte
character string. In
this case, set
TL1_SN_LEN_S
PECIAL_ONUT
YPE to
HG8240A. In
contrast, if
TL1_ONT_SN_L
ENGTH is set to
12, it indicates that
the returned SN is
in the format of
12-byte character

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 46


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 9 Setting Configuration Items

Configur Config Description De Re Restar Remarks


ation uratio fa co ting
Item n Item ult m Proces
Value Va me ses
lu nd
e ed
Va
lu
e

string. However,
the HG8240A
needs to support
an SN in the
format of 16-byte
character string. In
this case, set
TL1_SN_LEN_S
PECIAL_ONUT
YPE to
HG8240A.

SYNC_C 0 Indicates that the 0 0 BmsAc Command


OMPLET NE cess_* involved by the
ED_NOTI synchronization process configuration
FY_OSS results are not (multip item: Notifying
reported to the le Device
OSS. instanc Synchronization
es
1 Indicates that the involvi
NE ng
synchronization multipl
results are e
reported to the process
OSS. es)

TL1_USE 0 Indicates that the 0 0 TL1N Command


_HAZY_ ALIAS parameter BiDm involved by the
QRY_AT_ in LST-PORT configuration
LST_POR uses the exact item: LST-PORT
T match mode to When you query
filter ports when ports in fuzzy
the DID and DEV match mode, it
parameters are not takes a long time
set. to run the
command. If the
entered alias
matches many
ports, the
command may
time out. You are
advised to query
ports in exact

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 47


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 9 Setting Configuration Items

Configur Config Description De Re Restar Remarks


ation uratio fa co ting
Item n Item ult m Proces
Value Va me ses
lu nd
e ed
Va
lu
e

1 Indicates that the match mode or


ALIAS parameter enter filter criteria
in LST-PORT as precise as
uses the fuzzy possible when
match mode to querying ports in
filter ports when fuzzy match
the DID and DEV mode. Set the
parameters are not configuration
set. item based on
actual needs.

TL1_SHO 0 Indicates that in 0 1 TL1N Commands


W_MA56 the exported BiDm involved by the
83T_SWI resource files or inTL1 configuration
TCH response, the NBiD item: DMP-
device type of the m INVENTORY,
MA5683T is LST-DEV, and
displayed as LST-DEVINFO
MA5680T.

1 Indicates that in
the exported
resource files or
response, the
device type of the
MA5683T is
displayed as
MA5683T.

NBI_INV 2 Indicates that you 2 2 TL1N Command


ENTORY_ can export the list BiDm involved by the
DUMP_V of inventory configuration
ERSION resources item: DMP-
including devices, INVENTORY
subracks, boards, The directory and
ports and Ethernet format of
aggregation exported XML
groups of a resource file vary
specified type to a with the value of
file. the configuration
item
NBI_INVENTO
RY_DUMP_VE

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 48


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 9 Setting Configuration Items

Configur Config Description De Re Restar Remarks


ation uratio fa co ting
Item n Item ult m Proces
Value Va me ses
lu nd
e ed
Va
lu
e
NOTE 3 Indicates that you RSION. For
This can export the details, see
configurat
resource Description of
ion item is
supported information about the directory
only by a specified device
the type, device, or
centralize resource type
d system. (device, subrack,
For the
DumpVer
board, daughter
sion board, port,
configurat Ethernet
ion item aggregation group,
in the BRA port, POTS
distribute port, ADSL port,
d system,
see 10.4
VDSL port, ONT,
Setting service virtual
Configur port,
ation VLANOFLAG,
Items. and Ethernet port)
to a file. If the
RES parameter is
not set to specify
the resource type,
you can export
data of the default
resource types
only, including
ME, SHELF,
CARD,
DAUGTHERCA
RD, and PORT.
To export data of
other resource
types, set the RES
parameter in the
command. For
example, run the
DMP-
INVENTORY:::
CTAG::RES=ME
SHELF CARD
DAUGHTERCA

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 49


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 9 Setting Configuration Items

Configur Config Description De Re Restar Remarks


ation uratio fa co ting
Item n Item ult m Proces
Value Va me ses
lu nd
e ed
Va
lu
e

RD PORT POTS and format of


BRA LAG ADSL exported files.
VDSL ONT
SERVICEPORT
VLANOFLAG
ETH command.

4 Indicates that you


can export the
resource
information
(device
information,
subrack, board,
daughter board,
port, ONT, splitter,
link, or protection
group) about a
device or devices
on the entire
network to a file.
Exporting
resources of a
specified type is
not supported.

LoadOfflin 0 Disables the TL1 0 0 Tl1NBi Command


e offline Dm involved by the
predeployment configuration
function. An error item: CFG-
message is MDUEX
displayed
indicating that
devices are offline
when you run the
CFG-MDUEX
command.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 50


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 9 Setting Configuration Items

Configur Config Description De Re Restar Remarks


ation uratio fa co ting
Item n Item ult m Proces
Value Va me ses
lu nd
e ed
Va
lu
e

1 Enables the TL1


offline
predeployment
function. A
scheduling task is
generated in the
scheduling center
when you run the
CFG-MDUEX
command, and
TL1 commands
are added to this
task as subitems.
After MDUs are
powered on, TL1
commands are
issued in
sequence.

XPON_C 0 Indicates that the 0 1 BmsAc The values of the


HECK_PA U2000 does not cess_* PWD parameter
SSWORD provide the process may be duplicate,
_REPEAT function of (multip which may affect
_SWITCH detecting ONT le current services.
authentication instanc Commands
password es involved by the
(corresponding to involvi configuration
PWD) conflicts. ng item: ADD-ONT
multipl and MOD-ONT
1 Indicates that the e
U2000 provides process
the function of es)
detecting ONT
authentication
password
(corresponding to
PWD) conflicts.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 51


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 9 Setting Configuration Items

Configur Config Description De Re Restar Remarks


ation uratio fa co ting
Item n Item ult m Proces
Value Va me ses
lu nd
e ed
Va
lu
e

XPON_C 0 Indicates that the 0 1 BmsAc Ensure that the


HECK_IA U2000 does not cess_* parameter is set
DIP_REP provide the process to a unique value
EAT_SWI function of (multip to avoid affecting
TCH detecting voice IP le provisioned
address or Layer 3 instanc services.
interface IP es Commands
address conflicts. involvi involved by the
ng configuration
1 Indicates that the multipl
U2000 provides item: CFG-
e ONTVAINDIV
the function of process
detecting voice IP and ADD-
es) VLANL3IF
address or Layer 3
interface IP
address conflicts.

XPON_C 0 Indicates that the 0 1 Ensure that


HECK_O U2000 does not parameters are set
NTDOMA provide the to a unique value
IN_REPE function of to avoid affecting
AT_SWIT detecting domain provisioned
CH name conflicts. services.

1 Indicates that the Command


U2000 provides involved by the
the function of configuration
detecting domain item: CFG-
name conflicts. ONTVAINDIV

XPON_C 0 Indicates that the 0 1


HECK_P U2000 does not
HONENU provide the
M_REPE function of
AT_SWIT detecting
CH telephone number
(corresponding to
SIPUSERNAME
_N if SIP is used
and corresponding
to H248DN_N if
H.248 is used)
conflicts.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 52


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 9 Setting Configuration Items

Configur Config Description De Re Restar Remarks


ation uratio fa co ting
Item n Item ult m Proces
Value Va me ses
lu nd
e ed
Va
lu
e

1 Indicates that the


U2000 provides
the function of
detecting
telephone number
(corresponding to
SIPUSERNAME
_N if SIP is used
and corresponding
to H248DN_N if
H.248 is used)
conflicts.

XPON_C 0 Indicates that the 0 1 BmsAc Commands


HECK_M U2000 does not cess_* involved by the
AC_REPE provide the process configuration
AT_SWIT function of (multip item: ADD-
CH detecting ONU le EPONONT and
MAC addresses instanc MOD-
conflicts. es EPONONT
involvi
1 Indicates that the ng
U2000 provides multipl
the function of e
detecting ONU process
MAC addresses es)
conflicts.

CMTS_C 0 Indicates that 0 0 BmsAc Commands


M_SNMP some parameters cess_* involved by the
QUERYS are obtained from process configuration
WITCH the cable modem (multip item: LST-
termination system le CMPNM-EQD
(CMTS) side, and instanc and LST-
is returned during es CMPNM-SUB
periodic polling. involvi
ng
multipl
e
process
es)

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 53


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 9 Setting Configuration Items

Configur Config Description De Re Restar Remarks


ation uratio fa co ting
Item n Item ult m Proces
Value Va me ses
lu nd
e ed
Va
lu
e

1 Indicates that
some parameters
are obtained from
the CM side, and
is returned in real
time. The
prerequisite is that
the U2000 and
CM are reachable
to each other and
the CM is online.

TL1_USE 0 Indicates that user 1 1 Tl1NBi For details, see


ROPERL operation logs will Dm 23.11 Recording
OG_SWIT not be recorded. TL1 User Logs.
CH
1 Indicates that user
operation logs will
be recorded.

BMS_TL1 default If this def def Tl1NBi For details, see


_NBI_IP configuration item aul aul Dm 23.13 How to Set
NOTE is set to default, t t the IP Address
Before the listening IP Listening Range.
using the address does not
configurat need to be set. At
ion item,
this moment, the
modify
the listening IP
ListenAll address is the
Ip floating IP
configura address, that is, the
tion item value of the
first.
floatServerName
configruation item
in oss\server\etc
\conf
\sysconfigure.xml
.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 54


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 9 Setting Configuration Items

Configur Config Description De Re Restar Remarks


ation uratio fa co ting
Item n Item ult m Proces
Value Va me ses
lu nd
e ed
Va
lu
e

IP l If this
address configuration
item is set to a
valid IP
address, the
TL1 NBI only
listens to the
messages sent
from the IP
address.
l If this
configuration
item is set to an
invalid IP
address, the
listening IP
address is the
floating IP
address, that is,
the value of the
floatServerNa
me
configuration
item in oss
\server\etc
\conf
\sysconfigure.
xml.

XPON_S 0 Indicates that the 0 0 BmsAc Command


UPPORT_ IP address cess_* involved by the
LAN_IP_ segment of ONT process configuration
CONFIG LAN ports cannot (multip item: CFG-
be set. le ONTVAINDIV
instanc
1 Indicates that the es
IP address involvi
segment of ONT ng
LAN ports can be multipl
set. e
process
es)

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 55


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 9 Setting Configuration Items

Configur Config Description De Re Restar Remarks


ation uratio fa co ting
Item n Item ult m Proces
Value Va me ses
lu nd
e ed
Va
lu
e

NBI_CHE 0 Indicates that the 0 0 TL1N Command


CK_RID_I value of the RID BiDm involved by the
NPUT_S parameter can be inTL1 configuration
WITCH set to quotation NBiD item: MOD-
marks except for m SERVICEPORT
two single and CRT-
quotation marks SERVICEPORT
(''), such as one
single quotation
mark (') or three
single quotation
marks (''').

1 Indicates that the


value of the RID
parameter cannot
be set to quotation
marks except for
two single
quotation marks
(''), such as one
single quotation
mark (') or three
single quotation
marks (''').

OPERATI 0 Indicates that the 0 0 - Command


ON_MOD U2000 does not involved by the
E verify the NE SSH configuration
fingerprint. item: CFG-
DEVEX
1 Indicates that the
U2000 verifies the
NE SSH
fingerprint.

CMMORE 0 Indicates that no 0 0 TL1N Command


INFO other information BiDm involved by the
is exported when configuration
the CM resources item:DMP-
are exported INVENTORY
through the NBI.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 56


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 9 Setting Configuration Items

Configur Config Description De Re Restar Remarks


ation uratio fa co ting
Item n Item ult m Proces
Value Va me ses
lu nd
e ed
Va
lu
e

1 Indicates that the


DOC version is
exported when the
CM resources are
exported through
the NBI.

TL1_IS_A 0 Default Output 0 0 TL1N Command


DD_BASI Parameter is: DID BiDm involved by the
CPROPER DEV FN inTL1 configuration
TY FRAMENAME NBiD item: LST-
FRAMESTAT m FRAME

1 Default Output
Parameter is: DID
DEV FN
FRAMENAME
FRAMESTAT
FRAMELOCALN
AME SHELF
FRAMESUPPLIE
R

XPONCO 0 Returns CIGG as 0 0 BmsAc Command


MMON_T the terminal types cess involved by the
HIRDON of CIGG vendors' TL1N configuration
T_EQUIP ONUs. BiDm item: LST-
MENT_F inTL1 GPONONTAUT
ORMAT 1 Returns the actual NBiD OFIND and
ONU types as the m LST-
terminal types of EPONONTAUT
CIGG vendors' OFIND
ONUs.

TL1_MA 15 Maximum number 15 15 TL1N -


X_SESSI of concurrent BiDm
ONCOUN logins allowed by
T the TL1 NBI.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 57


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 9 Setting Configuration Items

Configur Config Description De Re Restar Remarks


ation uratio fa co ting
Item n Item ult m Proces
Value Va me ses
lu nd
e ed
Va
lu
e

TL1_CHA AutoSe Chinese G GB TL1N -


RSET lect environment uses B K BiDm
the GBK encoding K
format. English
environment uses
the ISO-8859–1
encoding format.
Other
environments use
the UTF-8
encoding format.

UTF-8 Uses the UTF-8


encoding format.

ISO– Uses the


8859– ISO-8859–1
1 encoding format.

GBK Uses the GBK


encoding format.

TL1_MA 15 Maximum number 15 15 TL1N -


X_IP_CO of connection BiDm
NNECTIO established with a
N single IP address
(value range:
1-1024).

NBIFRA 60 Login failure 60 60 TL1N -


ME_LOGI count interval BiDm
N_FAIL_ (value range:
COUNT_I 1-86400, unit: s).
NTERVAL

NBIFRA 3 Maximum number 3 3 TL1N -


ME_MAX of failed login BiDm
_ALLOW attempts (value
ED_LOGI range: 1-10).
N_FAILS

NBIFRA 180 Duration in the 18 18 TL1N -


ME_MAX blacklist (value 0 0 BiDm
_BLOCK_ range: 1-86400,
TIME unit: s).

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 58


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 9 Setting Configuration Items

Configur Config Description De Re Restar Remarks


ation uratio fa co ting
Item n Item ult m Proces
Value Va me ses
lu nd
e ed
Va
lu
e

BMS_LST 0 Indicates GMT is 0 0 TL1N Command


_DEV_CR not displayed in BiDm involved by the
TDATE_S the CRTDATE inTL1 configuration
HOW_G parameter when NBiD item:LST-DEV
MT querying the time m
that an NE is
created.

1 Indicates GMT is
displayed in the
CRTDATE
parameter when
querying the time
that an NE is
created.

l Configuration items of the BMSDB..bms_cfg_tab database


TL1_LSTSERVICEPORT_PT is used as an example to describe how to set
configuration items in the BMSDB..bms_cfg_tab database.
a. Run the following SQL statement to query the configuration item status:
select CfgValue from BMSDB..bms_cfg_tab where CfgName =
'TL1_LSTSERVICEPORT_PT'
b. If the value of TL1_LSTSERVICEPORT_PT is not 1, run the following SQL
statement:
update BMSDB..bms_cfg_tab set CfgValue = '1' where CfgName =
'TL1_LSTSERVICEPORT_PT'
c. Run the following SQL statement to check whether the modification succeeds:
select CfgValue from BMSDB..bms_cfg_tab where CfgName =
'TL1_LSTSERVICEPORT_PT'
d. Log in to the System Monitor client and restart the TL1NBiDm process.
e. Issue the command again and check whether the value of PT returned meets
requirements.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 59


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 9 Setting Configuration Items

Table 9-2 Configuration item description


Configurat Co Description Def Rec Resta Remarks
ion Item nfi ault om rting
gur Val me Proce
ati ue nde sses
on d
Ite Val
m ue
Val
ue

PROTOCO 0 Indicates that the 2 2 TL1N For details, see


L U2000 and OSS use BiDm 4.5 Security
NOTE the TCP protocol to Mechanism.
This communicate with
configuratio each other.
n item is
supported 2 Indicates that the
only by the U2000 and OSS use
centralized the SSL protocol to
system. For
the
communicate with
Protocol each other.
configuratio
n item in
the
distributed
system, see
10.4
Setting
Configurat
ion Items.

TL1_TOLE 0 Indicates that an error 1 1 - For details, see


RANCCE_ message is displayed 16.13.3
ERROR when a user runs the Deleting a
DEL- Service Virtual
SERVICEPORT Port (DEL-
command to delete SERVICEPO
nonexistent service RT).
ports for the
MA5600T, MA5680T,
MA5603T
V800R006C02 and
later versions,
MA5608T, MA5800
series, and all MDUs.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 60


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 9 Setting Configuration Items

Configurat Co Description Def Rec Resta Remarks


ion Item nfi ault om rting
gur Val me Proce
ati ue nde sses
on d
Ite Val
m ue
Val
ue

1 Indicates that a
success message is
displayed when a user
runs the DEL-
SERVICEPORT
command to delete
nonexistent service
ports for the
MA5600T, MA5680T,
MA5603T
V800R006C02 and
later versions,
MA5608T, MA5800
series, and all MDUs.

DUMP_MA 20 Indicates the size of 20 20 BmsA Commands


X_FILE_SI each exported file. The ccess involved by the
ZE value indicates that the _* configuration
maximum size of each proce item: DMP-
exported file is 20 ss E2EPERF,
MB. (multi DMP-
ple ETHPERF,
DUMP_MA 20 Indicates the 20 20 instan DMP-
X_FILE_S maximum number of ces ONTPERF,
AVE_NUM files that can be saved. involv and DMP-
The value indicates ing POTSPERF
that a maximum of 20 multi
files can be exported. ple
proce
sses)

UseRightPa 0 Indicates that the 0 1 TL1N Command


raNameFor original spelling BiDm involved by the
PotsState format FAILED- configuration
REGISTRATTION is item: LST-
retained. ONTPOTSST
ATE
1 Indicates that the
correct spelling format
FAILED-
REGISTRATION is
used.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 61


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 9 Setting Configuration Items

Configurat Co Description Def Rec Resta Remarks


ion Item nfi ault om rting
gur Val me Proce
ati ue nde sses
on d
Ite Val
m ue
Val
ue

IsSupportX 0 Disables query of user- 0 0 BmsA Command


MLSyn defined ONT ccess involved by the
parameters. _* configuration
proce item:SYN-
1 Enables query of user- ss ONTXML
defined ONT (multi
parameters. ple
instan
ces
involv
ing
multi
ple
proce
sses)

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 62


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 9 Setting Configuration Items

Configurat Co Description Def Rec Resta Remarks


ion Item nfi ault om rting
gur Val me Proce
ati ue nde sses
on d
Ite Val
m ue
Val
ue

TL1_LSTS 0 Indicates that the 0 0 TL1N Command


ERVICEPO values of the output BiDm involved by the
RT_PT parameter PT of the configuration
LST-SERVICEPORT item: LST-
command are as SERVICEPO
follows: RT
l LAN-ADSL
l LAN-SHDSL
l LAN-ATM
l LAN-LAN
l LAN-ETH
l LAN-VDSL2
l LAN-GFAST
l LAN-GPON
l LAN-EPON
l SPU-GPON
l SPU-SPU
l SPU-LAN
l LAN-SPU
l LAN-EPONONT
LAN
l LAN-GPONONT
LAN
l LAN-ONT
IPHOST
l LAN-ONT
l LAN-GPONONT
VDSL2
l UPLINKPORT-
ETHER
l UPLINKPORT-
LAN
l UPLINKPORT-
GPON

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 63


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 9 Setting Configuration Items

Configurat Co Description Def Rec Resta Remarks


ion Item nfi ault om rting
gur Val me Proce
ati ue nde sses
on d
Ite Val
m ue
Val
ue

1 Indicates that the


values of the output
parameter PT of the
LST-SERVICEPORT
command are as
follows:
l ADSL
l SHDSL
l ATM
l LAN
l ETH
l VDSL2
l GFAST
l GPON
l EPON
l SPU
l CNULAN
l XPON

NEED_REF 0 Indicates that the 1 0 re- For details, see


RESH_WIN U2000 does not impor 16.1.12
refresh aliases on the t the Modifying the
client after the aliases memo Attributes of
are modified through ry an ADSL Port
an NBI. You can query table (MOD-
the aliases again to ADSLPORT),
refresh them. 16.1.13
Modifying the
Attributes of
an ADSL Port
Through the
Enhanced
Command
(MOD-
ADSLPORTE
X),16.2.11
Modifying the
Attributes of
an SHDSL

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 64


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 9 Setting Configuration Items

Configurat Co Description Def Rec Resta Remarks


ion Item nfi ault om rting
gur Val me Proce
ati ue nde sses
on d
Ite Val
m ue
Val
ue

1 Indicates that the Port (MOD-


U2000 refreshes SHDSLPORT)
aliases on the client ,16.3.3
after the aliases are Modifying the
modified through an Attributes of a
NBI. VDSL2 Port
(MOD-
VDSL2PORT)
or16.3.4
Modifying the
Attributes of a
VDSL2 Port
Through the
Enhanced
Command
(MOD-
VDSL2PORT
EX).

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 65


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 10 Distributed System

10 Distributed System

About This Chapter

In a distributed U2000 system, the deployment modes, functions and features of NBIs differ
from those in a centralized system. This topic mainly describes the TL1 NBI overview, list of
unsupported commands, TL1 NBI gateway maintenance, and configuration item setting in a
distributed system.

10.1 Overview
This topic describes the position and installation mode, user creation, TL1 security certificate,
and TL1 service maintenance of the NBI gateway in a distributed system.
10.2 List of Unsupported Commands
This topic describes the list of commands that are not supported by the TL1 NBI in a
distributed system.
10.3 Maintaining the TL1 NBI Gateway Service
Among the northbound interface (NBI) gateways in a distributed system, the TL1 NBI
gateway service cannot be maintained on the System Monitor client. Instead, it needs to be
started or ended manually.
10.4 Setting Configuration Items

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 66


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 10 Distributed System

10.1 Overview
This topic describes the position and installation mode, user creation, TL1 security certificate,
and TL1 service maintenance of the NBI gateway in a distributed system.

Position of the NBI Gateway


The OSS accesses the U2000 to manage networks through the NBI gateway. The NBI
gateway needs to be independently installed on the U2000 server and is protected by using
active and standby nodes. After one node is faulty, the other node is automatically connected.
Figure 10-1 shows the position of the NBI gateway in a distributed U2000 system.

Figure 10-1 Position of the NBI gateway

NBI Gateway Installation


The installation of the NBI gateway is closely related to the installation of the U2000 in a
distributed system. This guide by default considers that the NBI gateway has been installed
and describes only the configuration procedure and parameters. For details about the software
and hardware configurations and installation procedure of the NBI gateway, see the U2000
Distributed System User Guide.

NBI Gateway User


The OSS can access the U2000 service only after passing the authentication of the NBI
gateway. Therefore, you need to create a user for the NBI gateway, including the user name,
password, and IP address. For details, see theU2000 Distributed System User Guide.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 67


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 10 Distributed System

TL1 Security Certificate of the NBI Gateway


The security certificate of the NBI gateway is used for secure communication with the OSS,
EM, or NM. You can select the default security certificate or apply for and replace it with a
new one.

Connection Limitation of the NBI Gateway


The maximum number of NBI gateway connections is 200. Each EM has no connection
limitation, and a maximum of 300 tasks are supported in a queue.

TL1 Service
In a distributed system, the TL1 service is running on the NBI gateway, EM, and NM. The
NBI gateway process is not running by default. You need to log in to the NBI gateway server
and start the gateway service manually. For details about how to check, start, and stop the NBI
gateway service, see 10.3 Maintaining the TL1 NBI Gateway Service.

10.2 List of Unsupported Commands


This topic describes the list of commands that are not supported by the TL1 NBI in a
distributed system.

Table 10-1 shows the list of commands that are not supported by the TL1 NBI in a distributed
system.

Table 10-1 List of unsupported commands

Category Command

Login/logout Logging In to the U2000 (ACT-USER)

Exiting the U2000 (CANC-USER)

Test bus Capturing the Test Bus (TST-CONNECT)

Releasing the Test Bus (TST-DISCEXT)

NE link Querying an NE Link (LST-NELINK)

Adding an NE Link (ADD-NELINK)

Modifying an NE Link (MOD-NELINK)

Deleting an NE Link (DEL-NELINK)

Global profile Creating an ADSL Alarm Profile (CRT-


ADSLALARMPROFILE)

Creating an ADSL Extended Profile (CRT-


ADSLEXTENDPROFILE)

Creating an ADSL Line Profile (CRT-ADSLLINEPROFILE)

Creating an IP Traffic Profile (CRT-IPTRAFFICPROFILE)

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 68


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 10 Distributed System

Category Command

Creating an MEF IP Traffic Profile (CRT-MEFIPTRAFFICPRO-


FILE)

Creating an SHDSL Alarm Profile (CRT-


SHDSLALARMPROFILE)

Creating an SHDSL Line Profile (CRT-SHDSLSPANPROFILE)

Creating an ATM Traffic Profile (CRT-TRAFFICPROFILE)

Deleting an ADSL Alarm Profile (DEL-


ADSLALARMPROFILE)

Deleting an ADSL Extended Profile (DEL-


ADSLEXTENDPROFILE)

Deleting an ADSL Line Profile (DEL-ADSLLINEPROFILE)

Deleting an IP Traffic Profile (DEL-IPTRAFFICPROFILE)

Deleting an MEF IP Traffic Profile (DEL-MEFIPTRAFFICPRO-


FILE)

Deleting an MGC Global Profile (DEL-MGCD)

Deleting an SHDSL Alarm Profile (DEL-


SHDSLALARMPROFILE)

Deleting an SHDSL Line Profile (DEL-SHDSLSPANPROFILE)

Deleting an ATM Traffic Profile (DEL-TRAFFICPROFILE)

Exporting files Exporting Service Port Statistics to Files (DMP-E2EPREF)

Exporting Ethernet Port Statistics to Files (DMP-ETHPREF)

Exporting GPON ONT Online Status Statistical Files (DMP-


ONTPERF)

Exporting PON Port Statistics to Files (DMP-PONPERF)

Exporting POTS Service Provisioning Statistical Files (DMP-


POTSPERF)

NMS configuration Querying the U2000 Version (LST-BMSVERSION)


management
Querying the NMS Information (LST-EMFSYSINFO)

10.3 Maintaining the TL1 NBI Gateway Service


Among the northbound interface (NBI) gateways in a distributed system, the TL1 NBI
gateway service cannot be maintained on the System Monitor client. Instead, it needs to be
started or ended manually.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 69


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 10 Distributed System

Prerequisites
The TL1 NBI gateway has been installed. For details about the software and hardware
configurations and installation procedure of the NBI gateway, see the U2000 Distributed
System User Guide.

Context
This operation applies only to starting or ending the TL1 NBI gateway among the NBI
gateways in a distributed system. For details about how to start or end the TL1 service on the
EM and NM in a centralized or distributed system, see 7.4 Starting the TL1 Process and 7.5
Stopping the TL1 Process.

Procedure
l End the TL1 NBI gateway service manually.
a. Log in to the OS as the ossuser user.
b. Stop the TL1 NBI gateway service.
$ cd /opt/oss/server/bin
$ svc_adm -cmd stopsvc TL1GW

c. Wait for several seconds.


If information similar to the following is displayed, the TL1 service is stopped:
TL1GW...............................stopped
------------cost: 1(sec)------------
svc_adm : info : STOP finished.

l Start the TL1 NBI gateway service manually.


a. Log in to the OS as the ossuser user.
b. Start the TL1 NBI gateway service.
$ cd /opt/oss/server/bin
$ svc_adm -cmd startsvc TL1GW

c. Wait for several seconds.


If information similar to the following is displayed, the TL1 NBI gateway service is
successfully started:
TL1GW...............................running
------------cost: 2(sec)------------
svc_adm : info : START finished.

NOTE
If the error message "Failed to connect to the monitorAgent" is displayed, run the following
commands to start the NBI GW NMS service:
$ cd /opt/oss/server/bin/
$ ./startnms.sh
If the following information is displayed, the NBI GW NMS service is successfully started:
Start GW NMS Successfully!

----End

10.4 Setting Configuration Items


In a distributed system, use the NBI command configuration tool to set the NBI gateway
configuration items. For other configuration items, refer to the specific TL1 commands and
set them on the U2000 NMS Maintenance Suite of the EM.

The specific procedure for setting the NBI gateway configuration items is as follows:

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 70


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 10 Distributed System

1. Log in to the OS as the root user.


2. Start the NBI command configuration tool on the gateway node.
# cd /opt/oss/server/combine_service/nbigw
# . /opt/oss/server/svc_profile.sh
# ./startup_nbiconfigtool.sh
3. When the supported NBI types are displayed, enter 1 to select the common TL1 NBI and
press Enter.
**********Welcome***********
Please input which NBI config you need display or modify:
[1]:CommonTL1
[2]:TelTL1
[3]:SoapXml
[q]:Quit
Enter your value:
1

NOTE
The meanings of the NBI types are as follows:
l [1]: CommonTL1: Indicates the common TL1 NBI that uses port 9819. [1]:CommonTL1 must be
selected.
l [2]: TelTL1: Indicates the TL1 NBI that uses ports 13027 and 13028.
l [3]: SoapXml: Indicates the XML NBI that complies with the customized MTOSI 1.1 standards.
4. When all configuration items and their values are displayed, enter Y and press Enter if
you need to modify them.
**************Current Value****************
DumpVersion(2/3/4) :.2
DevMean(DevName/DevIP) :.DevName
Protocol(TCP/SSL) :.TCP
CharSet(UTF-8/ISO-8859-1/GBK) :.GBK
ACL :Not Config
*****************************************
Do you want to modify config?(Y/N)
Y

Table 10-2 Configuration item description

Configuration Value Description Default


Item Value

DevMean DevName This configuration item resides in TL1 DevName


commands and locates objects by
device name.

DevIP This configuration item resides in TL1


commands and locates objects by
device IP.

Protocol TCP The OSS communicates with the NBI SSL


gateway over TCP.

SSL The OSS communicates with the NBI


gateway over SSL.

CharSet GBK The TL1 character encoding format is GBK


GBK.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 71


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 10 Distributed System

Configuration Value Description Default


Item Value

UTF-8 The TL1 character encoding format is


UTF-8.

ISO-8859-1 The TL1 character encoding format is


ISO-8859-1.

DumpVersion 2 If the DumpVersion configuration 2


item is set to 2 (default value), you can
export the list of inventory resources
including devices, subracks, boards,
ports and Ethernet aggregation groups
of a specified type to a file.

3 If the DumpVersion configuration


item is set to 3, you can export the
resource information about a specified
device type, device, or resource type
(device, subrack, board, daughter
board, port, Ethernet aggregation
group, BRA port, POTS port, ADSL
port, VDSL port, ONT, service virtual
port, VLANOFLAG, or Ethernet port)
to a file.

4 If the DumpVersion configuration


item is set to 4, you can export the
resource information (device
information, subrack, board, daughter
board, port, ONT, splitter, link, or
protection group) about a device or
devices on the entire network to a file.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 72


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 10 Distributed System

Configuration Value Description Default


Item Value

ACL A single IP This configuration item indicates the NA


address or a access control list (ACL) of the TL1
certain IP NBI.
address
segment.
The value
is in the
following
format:
l A single
IP
address:
192.168
.10.1
l A
certain
IP
address
segment
:
192.168
.10.1/24
or
0.0.0.0-
255.255
.
255.255

5. Select the configuration items to be modified, for example, enter 2 and TCP and press
Enter. Then the OSS connects to the NBI gateway over TCP. After the modification
succeeds, the "Success!" message is displayed.
Which item you need modify?
[0] DumpVersion(2/3/4)
[1] DevMean(DevName/DevIP)
[2] Protocol(TCP/SSL)
[3] CharSet(UTF-8/ISO-8859-1/GBK)
[4] ACL
Please enter which item you need modify:(example 1)
2
Enter your item value:
TCP
Success!

6. Restart the TL1 NBI gateway service.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 73


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 11 Command Format

11 Command Format

About This Chapter

This topic describes the formats of the commands, responses, and resource change
notifications.

11.1 Format Description


This topic describes the functions of the TL1 NBI commands.
11.2 Command Format Description
This topic describes the formats and parameters of the TL1 NBI commands.
11.3 Response Format Description
This topic describes the parameters of the responses to the TL1 NBI commands.
11.4 Format Description of the Resource Change Notification
This topic describes the format and parameters of the command for resource change
notification of the TL1 NBI

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 74


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 11 Command Format

11.1 Format Description


This topic describes the functions of the TL1 NBI commands.

Command Format
Command format refers to the format user enters for command request. The corresponding
matching requirements on running certain commands are as following:
l Commands for operation: All the character strings match with each other precisely.
l Commands for query: Perform a fuzzy query for the optional parameter of character
string type. Perform a precise matching operation for the mandatory parameter with
character strings of data type. If the filter criteria user entered identifies several records
but cannot identify one record at one time, the NBI returns the records to the user in the
form of a list.
l Commands for the parameters of fixed value: The input and output can be in the form of
either enumerated value or character string. The parameters can also be set through the
configuration file. In this case, the methods for inputting and outputting must be the
same.

Response Format
Response format refers to the format of the response to the command. This format must be
related to the corresponding compulsory command.

Format of the Resource Change Notification


The Autonomous Message of TL1 is the notification message of the NBI. Autonomous
Message is sent from the EMS to the upper-layer management system and need not be related
to the corresponding compulsory commands.
The Functions of the Autonomous Messages are as follows:
l Reports the alarming or non-alarming emergencies
l Reports the scheduled test and diagnosis to NEs
l Reports inspection data on performance specifications
l Reports the change of the data in the NE database
l Reports the preceding information regularly according to the selection criteria of the NE

Command Symbol
Table 11-1 provides the description of command symbols enclosed in different formats.

Table 11-1 Command symbol description


Symbol Description

<> Encloses an identifier, for example, <int-num> indicates an integer


type.

[] Encloses an optional character or message.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 75


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 11 Command Format

Symbol Description

() Encloses a group of mandatory symbol and messages.


NOTE
If a field in a command format is not enclosed with any symbol, it indicates that
the field is mandatory. For example, in the command format
LOGIN:::CTAG::UN=user-name,PWD=password;, the UN=user-name and
PWD=password fields are not enclosed with any symbol, it indicates that the
UN and PWD parameters are mandatory.

^ Refers to the Space character.

cr Refers to the Enter character.

lf Indicates to wrap to a new line.

| Separates multiple options. Only one option can be selected, for


example, the value a|b|c indicates that you can only select a, b, or c.

::= Takes the left and right part of one grammar rule apart, for example,
the value <digit> ::= (0|1|~|9) indicates that the value <digit> is any
figure ranges from 0 to 9.

11.2 Command Format Description


This topic describes the formats and parameters of the TL1 NBI commands.

Command Format
<command_code>:<staging_parameter_blocks>:<message_payload_block>;
<command code>::=<verb>[-<modifier>[-<modifiers>]]
Staging Parameter Block::=[<target identifier>]:<access identifier(s)>:<ctag>:

NOTICE
If an optional parameter does not exist, do not omit the spacing character between this
parameter and the one next to it. For example, if the <target identifier> does not exist, the ":"
follows it must remain.

Parameter Description
Table 11-2 describes the parameters of the TL1 command.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 76


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 11 Command Format

Table 11-2 Parameters of the TL1 command


Parameter Description

command_code Refers to the command code, and indicates what needs to be


executed.
l verb: a mandatory parameter and specifies the operations that
the command executes. In U2000, it is defined as the name of
the notice message
l modifier: optional value in the verb parameter. There are two
such values in the parameter and are separated by a hyphen (-)
symbol.

staging_parameter_blo Command parameter.


cks l target identifier: not applicable in this case
l access identifier: Is used for location
l ctag (correlation tag): the symbol connecting the entered
message and the response message; "ctag" can be any
character other than a colon (:), semicolon (;) and comma (,)
and must be consistent between the input message and the
response message.
NOTE
The following characters are supported:
l English letters: A-Z and a-z.
l Numbers: 0-9.
l Symbols: ( ) _ - + . / \ and space.
Some commands allow single quotation marks '' in the Alias field or
certain fields, indicating that they are left blank.

message_payload_blo Refers to the main content of the message and is named pay-load;
ck It can be either a null value or multiple data block in the format
of: "(<Px>(,<Px>)*)*".
"Px" indicates a data item. Use a comma (,) to separate several
data items. The format of the data item is shown as
"<keyword>=<value>".

Example
The LST-FRAME command is used as an example to describe the command format.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 77


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 11 Command Format

11.3 Response Format Description


This topic describes the parameters of the responses to the TL1 NBI commands.

Format Description
The formats of the responses are of the following two types:
l Format of the response to the operation command:
– <header><response identification><text block><terminator>

– header::=<cr><lf><lf>^^^<sid>^<year>-<month>-
<day>^<hour>:<minute>:<second>

– response identification::=<cr><lf>M^^<ctag>^<completion code>

– text block::=(<cr><lf>^^^<EN=error-code>^^^<ENDESC=error-description>)
terminator::=<cr><lf>(;|>)

l Format of the response to the query command:


– <header><response identification><text block><terminator>

– header::=<cr><lf><lf>^^^<sid>^<year>-<month>-
<day>^<hour>:<minute>:<second>

– response identification::=<cr><lf>M^^<ctag>^<completion code>

– text block::=(<cr><lf>^^^<EN=error-code>^^^<ENDESC=error-description>)
[(<cr> <lf>^^^<quoted line>)]

– quoted line::=<blktag=block-tag><cr><lf>^^^<blkcount=currentblock-
count><cr><lf>^^^< blktotal=total-count><cr><lf><result>

– result::=<cr><lf><title><cr><lf>(<->*)<cr><lf>(<attribs>((<values>)*))(<-
>*)<cr><lf><cr><lf>

– attribs::=<attrib>((<tab><attrib>)*)<cr><lf>

– values::=<value>((<tab><value>)*)<cr><lf>

– terminator::=<cr><lf>(;|>)

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 78


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 11 Command Format

Parameter Description
Table 11-3 describes the parameters of the responses to the TL1 NBI commands.

Table 11-3 Parameters of the responses to the TL1 NBI commands


Parameter Description

header Indicates the header of the message, and is the common part of
the responding message and automatic reported message. A
header includes the device ID (sid), the date, and the time.

response identification Indicates the response identifier.


l ctag (correlation tag): the symbol connecting the entered
message and the response message; "ctag" can be any
character other than a colon (:), semicolon (;) and comma (,)
and must be consistent between the input message and the
response message.
l completion code: functions as an ending identifier.

text block Indicates the body text of the responding message.


l EN: error code.
l ENDESC: error description.
NOTE
The ENDESC parameter (that is, the returned error description) in the
response information may be optimized in later versions. Therefore,
you are not advised to set the ENDESC parameter as the keyword for
OSS matching.
l quoted line: return parameter. When the quantity of the
querying information is too large, the NBI delivers the data to
the client end in packets. "blktag" indicates the sequencing
number of the current packet; "blkcount" indicates the amount
of the data enclosed in the current packet; "blktotal" indicates
the total amount of the data.
l title: character string type, indicates the title of the response.
l attrib: character string type, indicates the attribute name.
l value: character string type, indicates the attribute value. --
indicates that the current NE does not support this attribute or
the attribute value is invalid.

terminator Refers to the ending identifier of the response, including ">"and


";".

Example
The response information to the LST-FRAME command is used as an example to describe
the response format.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 79


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 11 Command Format

11.4 Format Description of the Resource Change


Notification
This topic describes the format and parameters of the command for resource change
notification of the TL1 NBI

Format of Resources Change Notification


<header><auto id>[<text block>]<terminator>
header::=<cr><lf><lf>^^^<sid>^<year>-<month>-<day>^<hour>:<minute>:<second>
auto id::=<cr><lf><almcde>^^<atag>^<verb>[^<modifier>[^<modifier>]]
text block::=(<cr><lf>^^^<unquotedline>)|(<cr><lf>^^^<quoted line>)|
(<cr><lf>^^^<comment>)
terminator::=<cr><lf>(;|>)

Parameter Description
Table 11-4 describes the parameters required for the resource change notification.

Table 11-4 Parameters required for the resource change notification


Parameter Description

header Indicates the header of the message, and is the common part of
the responding message and automatic reported message. A
header includes the device ID (sid), date and time.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 80


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 11 Command Format

Parameter Description

auto id Indicates the level and state of automatic reported message.


l almcde: indicates the severity different alarms, such as *C
(Critical), ** (Major), * (Minor) and A (Warning).
l atag: a correlation tag of the automatic reported message that
must be consecutive and allocated by the NE. The atag
parameter must be contained by each automatic reported
message. The "atag" helps the upper-layer EMS to locate the
cause of the automatic reported message and is used to
indicate whether any error occurs while the upper-layer EMS
receives the messages.
l verb: a mandatory parameter and specifies the operations that
the command executes. In U2000, "verb" defines the name of
the message and includes two optional modifier values that
are separated by a blank space.
NOTE
With regard to the message of resources change notification, the almcde
parameter is A.

text block Indicates the body text of the responding messages.


l unquoted line: error code. In the notification, it is always "0".
l quoted line: content of the message packets. It is used to
deposit the notification.
l comment: located between "/*" and "*/", and is used to
explain a message.

terminator The ending identifier of the responding messages,


including">"and";".

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 81


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 12 Supported Devices of the Same Series

12 Supported Devices of the Same Series

This topic describes devices that TL1 commands support. Because devices of the same series
have the same features, the Device Type column in the following table lists only one type of
device.

Table 12-1 Device type parameters


Device Device Device Types of the Remarks
Type No. Type Same Series

96 MA5620 MA5620A, TL1 commands that apply to the


MA5620B, and MA5620 also apply to the
MA5620H MA5620A, MA5620B, and
MA5620H.

97 MA5626 MA5626A, TL1 commands that apply to the


MA5626B, and MA5626 also apply to the
MA5626H MA5626A, MA5626B, and
MA5626H.

100 MA5616 MA5616A TL1 commands that apply to the


MA5616 also apply to the
MA5616A.

104 MA5612 MA5612B TL1 commands that apply to the


MA5612 also apply to the
MA5612B.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 82


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

13 Controlling a Session and Performing


Operations on a Device

About This Chapter

This topic provides the commands and examples for controlling a session and performing
operations on a device.
Session control is used to manage the socket connection between the access adaptation
module and the U2000, thus providing protection against the unauthorized attackers on the
network. It is recommended that you change the user ID and password regularly during the
operation and maintenance of the system.
13.1 Controlling the Session
This topic provides the commands and examples for controlling the session.
13.2 Performing Operations on a Device
This topic provides the commands and examples for performing operations on a device. The
operations include synchronizing the time, adding, deleting, and resetting a device or board,
and adding a device alarm.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 83


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

13.1 Controlling the Session


This topic provides the commands and examples for controlling the session.

Session control is used to manage the socket connection between the access adaptation
module and the U2000, thus providing protection against the unauthorized attackers on the
network. It is recommended that you change the user ID and password regularly during the
operation and maintenance of the system.

13.1.1 Logging in to the U2000 (LOGIN)

Usage Note
When using the TL1 NBI function, make sure the OSS communicates with the U2000 using
port 9819.

This command is used to log in to the U2000 after a connection is successfully set up. If you
log in to the TL1 NBI successfully, you can issue NBI commands to perform operations on
the devices.

Command Format
LOGIN:::CTAG::UN=user-name,PWD=password;

Input Parameter
Parameter Type Range Description Default

UN OCTET SIZE (20) Indicates the user -


STRING name.

PWD OCTET SIZE (16) Indicates the -


STRING password.

NOTE

The default user name is admin(in the case of centralized deployment) or ssoadmin (in the case of
distributed deployment). Both users' initial passwords are Changeme_123 . The password must be changed
during the first login to ensure system security. Keep the password confidential and change it regularly.

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the operation command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.

Output Parameter
None.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 84


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Error Code
ID Description Solution

76546031 Invalid user name or Enter the correct user name


password. and password.

76545967 Invalid license. Apply for a new license and


update it.

2686058556 User relogin error. Do not log in to the U2000


again because you have
logged in.

1618280737 The number of sessions Check the TL1 client that


exceeds the maximum limit. you have logged in to. If the
Contact the administrator. upper limit is reached,
modify the configuration
item
TL1_MAX_SESSIONCO
UNT.

Example
To log in to the U2000 by entering the user name tester and the password Changeme_321
after a connection is successfully set up between the server and the client, run the following
command:

LOGIN:::1::UN=tester,PWD=Changeme_321;

The result is as follows:

0 2005-06-08 16:39:39
M 1 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.

Related Command
None.

13.1.2 Logging In to the U2000 (ACT-USER)

Usage Note
This command is used to log in to the EMS. After you log in to the EMS successfully, the
NMS can manage all the NEs in the EMS. If no operation is performed within 10 minutes,
you will be logged out automatically. To prevent such a problem, you can run the
SHAKEHAND:::CTAG::; command for handshaking to retain the connection. You can log
in to the U2000 from the NMS with a user account that is created on the U2000 EMS client.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 85


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Command Format
ACT-USER:[<TID>]:<UID>:<CTAG>::<PID>;

Input Parameter
Parameter Type Range Description Default

<TID> OCTET SIZE (20) Indicates the target N/A


STRING identifier. The value
of this parameter is
null. TID is
represented by two
successive colons.

<UID> OCTET SIZE (16) Indicates the existing N/A


STRING user names in the
EMS.

<PID> OCTET SIZE (16) Indicates the user N/A


STRING password.

NOTE

The default user name is admin(in the case of centralized deployment) or ssoadmin (in the case of
distributed deployment). Both users' initial passwords are Changeme_123 . The password must be changed
during the first login to ensure system security. Keep the password confidential and change it regularly.

Response Format
l Normal
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<sid>ˆYY-MM-DDˆHH:MM:SS cr lf
M^^<ctag>ˆCOMPLD cr lf
;

l Error
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<sid>ˆYY-MM-DDˆHH:MM:SS cr lf
M^^<ctag>ˆDENY cr lf
^^^<errcode><cr><lf>
^^^/*<error description>*/<cr><lf>
;

Output Parameter
None.

Error Code
Description Solution

User relogin error Do not log in to the U2000 again because you have logged in.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 86


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Example
To log in to the U2000 by entering the user name admin and the password Changeme_321,
run the following command:
ACT-USER::admin:100::Changeme_321;
The result is as follows:
l Normal
N2000BMS 09-01-01 02:15:27
M 100 COMPLD
;

l Error
N2000BMS 09-01-01 02:49:08
M 100 DENY
IDMS
/*Invalid user name or password.*/
;

Related Command
There is no related command.

13.1.3 Exiting the U2000 (LOGOUT)


Usage Note
None.

Command Format
LOGOUT:::CTAG::;

Input Parameter
None.

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the operation command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.

Output Parameter
None.

Error Code
None.

Example
To exit the U2000, run the following command:
LOGOUT:::8::;

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 87


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

The result is as follows:

0 2005-06-08 16:39:39
M 8 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.

Related Command
None.

13.1.4 Exiting the U2000 (CANC-USER)

Usage Note
This command is used to log out of the EMS. A user cannot force another user to log out of
the EMS.

Command Format
CANC-USER:[<TID>]:[<UID>]:<CTAG>;

Input Parameter
Parameter Type Range Description Default

<TID> OCTET SIZE (20) Indicates the target N/A


STRING identifier. The value
of this parameter is
blank here. TID is
represented by two
successive colons.

<UID> OCTET SIZE (16) Indicates the existing N/A


STRING user names in the
EMS.

NOTE

The default user name is admin(in the case of centralized deployment) or ssoadmin (in the case of
distributed deployment). Both users' initial passwords are Changeme_123 . The password must be changed
during the first login to ensure system security. Keep the password confidential and change it regularly.

Response Format
l Normal
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
M^^<ctag>^^COMPLD<cr><lf>
;
;
l Error

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 88


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<rsphdr><cr><lf>
M^^<ctag>^DENY<cr><lf>
^^^<errcode><cr><lf>
^^^/*<error description>*/<cr><lf>
;

Output Parameter
None.

Error Code
Description Solution

User does not log in Ensure that the entered user name is the same as the name of
the current user that has logged in to the system.

Example
To exit the U2000 by entering the user name admin, run the following command:

CANC-USER::admin:100;

The result is as follows:

l Normal
N2000BMS 04-01-01 15:23:20
M 100 COMPLD
;

l Error
N2000BMS 04-01-01 14:30:00
M 100 DENY
IDMS
/*User does not log in*/
;

Related Command
There is no related command.

13.1.5 Querying the U2000 Version (LST-BMSVERSION)

Usage Note
None.

Command Format
LST-BMSVERSION:::CTAG::;

Input Parameter
None.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 89


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the query command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.
title = "V" + Version + "R" + release version + "C" + customer
version + "SP" + spVersion name of attributes: VERSION

Output Parameter
Parameter Type Range Description

VERSION OCTET STRING SIZE (252) Indicates the


U2000 version.

Error Code
None.

Example
To query the U2000 version, run the following command:
LST-BMSVERSION:::1::;
The result is as follows:

0 2005-12-11 17:14:14
M 1 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
blktag=1
blkcount=1
blktotal=1

V200R016C60
------------
Version
V200R016C60
------------

Related Command
None.

13.1.6 Querying the NMS Information (LST-EMFSYSINFO)


Usage Note
None.

Command Format
LST-EMFSYSINFO:::CTAG::;

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 90


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Supporting Device
None.

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the query command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.
title=Information of EMS system
name of attributes:ID NAME TYPE MANUFATCTURE IP INTERFACE MANUADDRESS
OPERATESTATE SYSWARNSTATE MAXNECOUNT NECOUNT CREATOR CREATEDATE HARDWAREINFO
SOFTWAREINFO CREATORADDRESS CREATORTEL REMARK VERSION

Output Parameter
Param Type Range Description
eter

ID INTEGER 1 Indicates the NMS ID from a vendor.

NAME OCTET HUAWEIEMS Indicates the NMS name from a vendor.


STRING

TYPE OCTET EMS Indicates the NMS type from a vendor.


STRING

MAN OCTET HUAWEI Indicates the vendor name.


UFAT STRING
CTUR
E

IP OCTET SIZE (255) Indicates the IP address and port number


STRING used for the communication between the
NMS and the OSS.
The format is "IP address:port number".
For example, 10.71.210.219:9819.

INTER OCTET SIZE (255) Indicates the NMS version from a vendor.
FACE STRING

MAN OCTET SIZE (255) Indicates the location of the NMS server.
UADD STRING
RESS

OPER OCTET normal Indicates the running status of the NMS


ATEST STRING from a vendor.
ATE

SYSW OCTET Critical Indicates the alarm status of the NMS from
ARNS STRING Major a vendor. The highest severity of alarm is
TATE returned.
Minor
Warn
none

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 91


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Param Type Range Description


eter

MAX OCTET SIZE (255) Indicates the maximum NEs that the NMS
NECO STRING from a vendor can manage.
UNT

NECO OCTET SIZE (255) Indicates the number of NEs that the NMS
UNT STRING from a vendor is managing.

CREA OCTET SIZE (255) Indicates the ID of the installation engineer


TOR STRING of the NMS.

CREA OCTET SIZE (255) Indicates the NMS installation date.


TEDA STRING
TE

HARD OCTET PC Indicates the hardware information about


WARE STRING SUN the NMS server.
INFO

SOFT OCTET WINDOWS Indicates the software information about


WARE STRING SOLARIS the NMS server.
INFO

CREA OCTET SIZE (255) Indicates the address of the NMS


TORA STRING installation engineer.
DDRE
SS

CREA OCTET SIZE (255) Indicates the telephone number of the


TORT STRING NMS installation engineer.
EL

REMA OCTET SIZE (255) Indicates the NMS remarks.


RK STRING

VERSI OCTET SIZE (255) Indicates the software version of the NMS
ON STRING from a vendor.

NOTE

You may use personal information of users when querying the NMS information. Therefore, you are
obligated to take considerable measures, in compliance with the laws of the countries concerned and the user
privacy policies of your company, to ensure that the personal data of users is fully protected.

Error Code
None.

Example
To query the information about the NMS from a vendor, run the following command:
LST-EMFSYSINFO:::1::;

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 92


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

The result is as follows:

0 2010-12-13 12:11:24
M 1 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
blktag=1
blkcount=1
blktotal=1

Information of EMS system


----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------
ID NAME TYPE MANUFATCTURE IP INTERFACE MANUADDRESS OPERATESTATE SYSWARNSTATE
MAXNECOUNT NECOUNT CREATOR CREATEDATE HARDWAREINFO SOFTWAREINFO CREATORADDRESS
CREATORTEL REMARK VERSION
1 HUAWEIEMS EMS HUAWEI 10.71.210.81:9819 V200R016C60 shenzhen normal none 15000
0.390625 huawei -- SUN SOLARIS shenzhen 400-830-2118 Remark V200R016C60
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------
;

Related Command
None.

13.1.7 Handshaking (SHAKEHAND)

Usage Note
If the connection is idle within 10 minutes, the system automatically cancels the connection.
To prevent such a problem, you can issue the command for handshaking to retain the
connection without performing other operations.

Command Format
SHAKEHAND:::CTAG::;

Input Parameter
None.

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the operation command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.

Output Parameter
None.

Error Code
None.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 93


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Example
To issue the command for handshaking to the system, run the following command:

SHAKEHAND:::8::;

The result is as follows:

0 2005-06-08 16:39:39
M 8 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.

Related Command
None.

13.1.8 Handshaking (REPT-STAT)

Usage Note
If the test access session has been idle for 600 seconds, DISC-TACC will be automatically
executed to release the test access port (TAP) and cancel the test session. Run this handshake
command to retain the test session before the time (600 seconds) is out.

Command Format
REPT-STAT:<TID>::<CTAG>;

Supporting Device
Device Type No. Device Type

94 MA5603U
MA5603U V800R202C01 and later versions

Input Parameter
Parame Type Range Description Default
ter

TID OCTET SIZE Indicates the default device name. If N/A


STRING (128) the value of the configuration item
DEVMEAN is 1, the DEV parameter
indicates the IP address of the device.
For details about how to modify
configuration items, see 23.7 How to
Locate a Device According to the
IP Address.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 94


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Response Format
l Normal
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<sid>ˆYY-MM-DDˆHH:MM:SS cr lf
M^^<ctag>ˆCOMPLD cr lf
;

l Error
<cr><lf><lf>
^^^<sid>ˆYY-MM-DDˆHH:MM:SS cr lf
M^^<ctag>ˆDENY cr lf
^^^<errcode><cr><lf>
^^^/*<error description>*/<cr><lf>
;

Output Parameter
None.

Error Code
Description Solution

The TAP does not exist. The entered TAP number is different from the TAP number
specified by the device. In this case, enter the specified TAP
number and re-issue the CONN-LPACC-MET command.

Example
To issue the command for handshaking to the system, run the following command:
REPT-STAT:10.71.59.79::CTAG;
The result is as follows:
l Normal
7340116 11-01-30 11:08:37
M CTAG COMPLD
;

l Error
7340116 11-01-30 11:06:55
M CTAG DENY
IDMS
/*The TAP does not exist*/
;

Related Command
l CONN-LPACC-MET
l DISC-TACC

13.2 Performing Operations on a Device


This topic provides the commands and examples for performing operations on a device. The
operations include synchronizing the time, adding, deleting, and resetting a device or board,
and adding a device alarm.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 95


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

NOTE
If there is no description for the time format, the time of related commands is in UTC format by default.

13.2.1 Creating a Subnet (ADD-SUBNET)


Usage Note
This command is used to create a subnet on the U2000.

Command Format
ADD-SUBNET::NAMESEQUENCE=sequence of subnet name:CTAG::[COMMENT=subnet-comment];

Supporting Device
This command is used to perform operations on the U2000. Device type is not specified.

Input Parameter
Parame Type Range Description Default
ter

NAMES OCTET SIZE (1024) Indicates the sequence of N/A


EQUEN STRING subnet names. Names of
CE subnets in different
layers are separated by
backslash (\), for
example, \HW\F4. In a
distributed system, the
parameter value is in the
format of \EM subnet
name on the NM
\Subnet name sequence
on the EM, for example,
\EmSubmapem_184\H
W\F4.

COMM OCTET SIZE (255) Indicates the remarks for N/A


ENT STRING the subnet.

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the operation command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.

Output Parameter
None.

Error Code
None.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 96


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Example
To add a subnet named \HW\F4 with remarks abc, run the following command:

ADD-SUBNET::NAMESEQUENCE=\HW\F4:2::COMMENT=abc;

The result is as follows:


0 2011-05-01 16:39:39
M 2 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
;

Related Command
None.

13.2.2 Modifying a Subnet (MOD-SUBNET)

Usage Note
This command is used to modify the name and remarks of a subnet on the U2000.

Command Format
MOD-SUBNET::NAMESEQUENCE=sequence of subnet name:CTAG::[NAME=subnet name]
[,COMMENT=subnet-comment];

Supporting Device
This command is used to perform operations on the U2000. Device type is not specified.

Input Parameter
Param Type Range Description Default
eter

NAME OCTET SIZE (1024) Indicates the sequence of N/A


SEQU STRING subnet names. Names of
ENCE subnets in different layers
are separated by
backslash (\), for
example, \HW\F4. In a
distributed system, the
parameter value is in the
format of \EM subnet
name on the NM\Subnet
name sequence on the
EM, for example,
\EmSubmapem_184\H
W\F4.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 97


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Param Type Range Description Default


eter

NAME OCTET SIZE (128) Indicates the name of the N/A


STRING lowest level subnet. For
example, F4 in \HW\F4 is
the name of the lowest
level subnet. Do not enter
backslash (\) for this
parameter.

COMM OCTET SIZE (255) Indicates the remarks for N/A


ENT STRING the subnet.

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the operation command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.

Output Parameter
None.

Error Code
None.

Example
To modify the name of subnet \HW\F4 to \HW\F3, run the following command:
MOD-SUBNET::NAMESEQUENCE=\HW\F4:2::NAME=F3,COMMENT=1234;
The result is as follows:
0 2011-05-01 16:39:39
M 2 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
;

Related Command
None.

13.2.3 Deleting a Subnet (DEL-SUBNET)


Usage Note
This command is used to delete an empty subnet, which does not contain lower-level subnets
or devices.

Command Format
DEL-SUBNET::NAMESEQUENCE=sequence of subnet name:CTAG::;

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 98


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Supporting Device
This command is used to perform operations on the U2000. Device type is not specified.

Input Parameter
Param Type Range Description Default
eter

NAME OCTET SIZE (1024) Indicates the sequence of N/A


SEQU STRING subnet names. Names of
ENCE subnets in different layers
are separated by
backslash (\), for
example, \HW\F4. In a
distributed system, the
parameter value is in the
format of \EM subnet
name on the NM\Subnet
name sequence on the
EM, for example,
\EmSubmapem_184\H
W\F4.
You can only delete the
lowest level subnet. For
example, if you enter
\HW\F4 or F4, only
subnet F4 is deleted.

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the operation command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.

Output Parameter
None.

Error Code
None.

Example
To delete a subnet named F4, run the following command:

DEL-SUBNET::NAMESEQUENCE=\HW\F4:2::;

The result is as follows:


0 2011-05-01 16:39:39
M 2 COMPLD

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 99


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
;

Related Command
None.

13.2.4 Adding an NE Link (ADD-NELINK)

Usage Note
This command is used to add an NE link on the U2000. A source and a sink end must exist on
the U2000.

Command Format
ADD-NELINK::NAME=link-name,TYPE=link-type,SOURCEDEV=source device
name[,SOURCEFN=source frame no.,SOURCESN=source slot no.,SOURCEPN=source port
no.],SINKDEV=sink device name[,SINKFN=sink frame no.,SINKSN=sink slot
no.,SINKPN=sink port no.]:CTAG::[NETTYPE=link network type][,COMMENT=link-comment]
[,ALIAS=link-userlabel][,OWNER=link-owner];

Supporting Device
This command is used to perform operations on the U2000. Device type is not specified.

Input Parameter
Param Type Range Description Default
eter

NAME OCTET SIZE (128) Indicates the name of the link. -


STRING

TYPE OCTET IPLINK Indicates the type of the link. -


STRING L2LINK l IP link
VIRTUALL l Layer 2 link
INK l Virtual link
NOTE
The SOURCEFN, SOURCESN,
SOURCEPN, SINKFN, SINKSN,
and SINKPN parameters are
mandatory if you set this parameter to
IPLINK or L2LINK.

SOURC OCTET SIZE (128) Indicates the name of the source -


EDEV STRING end.

SOURC Integer 0-255 Indicates the subrack ID of the -


EFN source end.

SOURC Integer 0-35 Indicates the slot ID of the source -


ESN end.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 100


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Param Type Range Description Default


eter

SOURC Integer 0-63 Indicates the port ID of the source -


EPN end.

SINKD OCTET SIZE (128) Indicates the name of the sink end. -
EV STRING

SINKF Integer 0-255 Indicates the subrack ID of the -


N sink end.

SINKS Integer 0-35 Indicates the slot ID of the sink -


N end.

SINKP Integer 0-63 Indicates the port ID of the sink -


N end.

NETTY OCTET IPV4 Indicates the network protocol -


PE STRING IPV6 type.
DUALSTA
CK

COMM OCTET SIZE (64) Indicates the remarks. -


ENT STRING

ALIAS OCTET SIZE (64) Indicates the alias of the link. -


STRING

OWNE OCTET SIZE (64) Indicates the owner of the link. -


R STRING

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the operation command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.

Output Parameter
None.

Error Code
None.

Example
To add an NE link named link_name, run the following command:
ADD-
NELINK::NAME=link_name,TYPE=L2LINK,SOURCEDEV=10.78.217.110,SOURCEF
N=0,SOURCESN=5,SOURCEPN=1,SINKDEV=10.78.217.114,SINKFN=0,SINKSN=1,SI
NKPN=1:CTAG::NETTYPE=IPV4,COMMENT=link_comment,ALIAS=link_alias,OW
NER=link_owner;

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 101


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

The result is as follows:


0 2011-08-01 16:39:39
M CTAG COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.

Related Command
None.

13.2.5 Modifying an NE Link (MOD-NELINK)

Usage Note
This command is used to modify information about an NE link on the U2000.

Command Format
MOD-NELINK::[LINKID=link-id][,NAME=link-name]:CTAG::[MNAME=modified-link-name]
[,NETTYPE=net-type][,COMMENT=link-comment][,ALIAS=link-userlabel][,OWNER=link-
owner];

Supporting Device
This command is used to perform operations on the U2000. Device type is not specified.

Input Parameter
Param Type Range Description Default
eter

LINKI OCTET SIZE(32) Indicates the ID of the -


D STRING link.

NAME OCTET SIZE(128) Indicates the name of the -


STRING link.

MNA OCTET SIZE(128) Indicates the name of a -


ME STRING new link.

NETT OCTET IPV4 Indicates the network -


YPE STRING IPV6 protocol type after
modification.
DUALSTAC
K

COMM OCTET SIZE (64) Indicates the new -


ENT STRING remarks.

ALIAS OCTET SIZE (64) Indicates the new alias of -


STRING the link.

OWNE OCTET SIZE (64) Indicates the new owner -


R STRING of the link.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 102


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the operation command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.

Output Parameter
None.

Error Code
None.

Example
To change the link name from link-name to link-new-name, run the following command:
MOD-NELINK::NAME=link-name:2::MNAME=link-new-
name,NETTYPE=IPV6,COMMENT=new-comment,ALIAS=new-alias,OWNER=new-
owner;
The result is as follows:
0 2011-05-01 16:39:39
M 2 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC = Succeeded.

Related Command
None.

13.2.6 Deleting an NE Link (DEL-NELINK)


Usage Note
This command is used to delete an NE link on the U2000.

Command Format
DEL-NELINK::[LINKID=link-id][,NAME=link-name]:CTAG::;

Supporting Device
This command is used to perform operations on the U2000. Device type is not specified.

Input Parameter
Param Type Range Description Default
eter

LINKI OCTET SIZE(32) Indicates the ID of the -


D STRING link.

NAME OCTET SIZE(128) Indicates the name of the -


STRING link.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 103


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the operation command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.

Output Parameter
None.

Error Code
None.

Example
To delete a subnet named F4, run the following command:

DEL-NELINK::NAME=link-name:CTAG::;

The result is as follows:


0 2011-08-01 16:39:39
M CTAG COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.

Related Command
None.

13.2.7 Synchronizing the Time (SYNC-DEVTIME)

Usage Note
This command is used to synchronize the time of the specified device so that the system time
of the device is the same as the system time of the U2000 server. The time returned by the
command is in UTC mode.

Command Format
SYNC-DEVTIME::(DID=Device-ID|DEV=Device-name|DT=Device-type):CTAG::;

Supporting Device
Device Type No. Device Type

34 MA5680T

44 MA5600V3

57 MA5606T

94 MA5603U

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 104


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Device Type No. Device Type

95 MA5603T

219 UA5000 (PVMV1)

253 UA5000 (IPMB)

249 MA5600T

2331 MA5608T

2348 MA5683T

2346/2349/2352/2353 MA5800-X17/MA5800-X7/MA5800-X15/MA5800-X2

Input Parameter
Parameter Type Range Description Default

DID INTEGER - Indicates the device ID. -

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the device -


STRING name by default. If the
value of the
configuration item
DEVMEAN is 1, the
DEV parameter
indicates the IP address
of the device. For
details about how to
modify configuration
items, see 23.7 How to
Locate a Device
According to the IP
Address.

DT INTEGER See Supporting Device Type. -


Device.

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the operation command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.
title=" synchronize the time of the device "+device-name+" with the server"
name of attributes:TIME

Output Parameter
None.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 105


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Error Code
ID Description Solution

2686058531 The device does not exist. Check and ensure that the
entered ID, name, and IP
address of the device are
correct.

Example
To synchronize the time of the device 10.78.217.111 so that the system time of the device is
the same as the system time of the U2000 server, run the following command:
SYNC-DEVTIME::DEV=10.78.217.111:1::;
The result is as follows:

0 2010-11-20 11:07:08
M 1 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
blktag=1
blkcount=1
blktotal=1
synchronize the time of the device 10.78.217.111 with the server
---------
TIME
2010-11-20 3:7:8:0
---------
;

Related Command
None.

13.2.8 Synchronizing NE Data (SYNC-DEV)


Usage Note
This command is used to synchronize the data of a specified NE to maintain the data
consistency between the U2000 and the NE.
The DEV (IP address of an OLT) and ONULOCATEINFO parameters can be used as the
location information. Before using these two parameters as the location information, make
sure that the DEV parameter indicates the IP address of the device. For details, see 23.7 How
to Locate a Device According to the IP Address.

Command Format
SYNC-DEV::(DID=device-ID|DEV=device-name|(DEV=device-olt-
ipaddress,ONULOCATEINFO=onu-locate-information))[,SRV=sync-service-name]:CTAG::;

Supporting Device
For information about the supporting devices, see 24.1 Parameters Related to the Device
Type.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 106


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Input Parameter
Paramete Type Range Description Default
r

DID INTEGER - Indicates the device ID. -

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the device name by -


STRING default. If the value of the
configuration item
DEVMEAN is 1, the DEV
parameter indicates the IP
address of the device. For
details about how to modify
configuration items, see 23.7
How to Locate a Device
According to the IP Address.
If you set both the DEV and
ONULOCATEINFO
parameters for an ONU, that is,
enter DEV=device-olt-
ipaddress,ONULOCATEINF
O=onu-locate-infomation, the
DEV parameter indicates the
IP address of the OLT.

ONULOC OCTET SIZE (128) Indicates the ONU location N/A


ATEINFO STRING information. This parameter is
used with the DEV parameter
(IP address of the OLT).
The format is subrack number/
slot ID/port ID/ONU ID. For
example, 0/2/0/0 indicates the
ONU 0 that is connected to
port 0/2/0.

SRV OCTET l PHYRES Indicates the types of services -


STRING l ADSL to be synchronized. Data of the
entire NE is synchronized if
l VDSL this parameter is blank.
l ETH
l SERVICE
PORT
l IGMP
l PROTOC
OL
l VOIP
l GPON
l EPON

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 107


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the operation command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.

Output Parameter
None.

Error Code
ID Description Solution

1610612773 Synchronizing. Please Wait until the


wait... synchronization is complete.

Example
To synchronize the data of the NE 10.78.217.114, run the following command:
SYNC-DEV::DEV=10.78.217.114:CTAG::;
The result is as follows:
7340071 2010-12-20 21:07:34
M CTAG COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
;

Related Command
None.

13.2.9 Deleting a Device (DEL-DEV)


Usage Note
This command is used to delete only the device and empty submap. When deleting an empty
submap, ensure that the submap name is unique.

Command Format
DEL-DEV::(DID=Device-ID|SUBMAP=submapname|(DEV=Device-name[,DEVIP=device-
IP])):CTAG::;

Supporting Device
Device Type No. Device Type

219 UA5000 (PVM)

37 MA5662

44 MA5600V3

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 108


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Device Type No. Device Type

253 UA5000 (IPMB)

34 MA5680T

57 MA5606T

249 MA5600T

61 MA5626E

62 MA5620E

64 MA5651

65 MA5620G

66 MA5626G

70 MA5610

92 MA5652G

94 MA5603U

95 MA5603T

96 MA5620

97 MA5626

100 MA5616

103 MA5635

104 MA5612

2312 MA5628

2319 MA5621

2313 MA5652

2317 MA5631

2318 MA5632

2321 MA5669

2331 MA5608T

2320 MA5612A

2322 MA5621A
NOTE
The MA5621 V800R311C00 and later versions support this command.

2323 MA5622A (V800R311C00 and later versions)

2324 MA5623 (V800R311C00 and later versions)

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 109


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Device Type No. Device Type

2326 MA5623A (V800R311C01 and later versions)

2333 MA5698

2335 MA5694

2336 MA5821

2337 MA5822

2338 MA5898

2339 MA5818

2340 MA5611S

2343 MA5694S

2348 MA5683T

2350 MA5811S

2346/2349/2352/2353 MA5800-X17/MA5800-X7/MA5800-X15/MA5800-X2

2354 EDFA3220-D

Input Parameter
Param Type Range Description Default
eter

DID INTEGER - Indicates the device ID. -

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the device -


STRING name by default. If the
value of the
configuration item
DEVMEAN is 1, the
DEV parameter
indicates the IP address
of the device. For details
about how to modify
configuration items, see
23.7 How to Locate a
Device According to
the IP Address.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 110


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Param Type Range Description Default


eter

SUBM OCTET 1-64 Indicates the sequence -


AP STRING of subnet names. Names
of subnets in different
layers are separated by
backslash (\), for
example, \HW\F4. In a
distributed system, the
parameter value is in the
format of \EM subnet
name on the NM
\Subnet name
sequence on the EM,
for example,
\EmSubmapem_184\H
W\F4.

DEVIP IPADDRESS - (Optional) Indicates the -


IP address of the device.

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the operation command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.

Output Parameter
None.

Error Code
ID Description Solution

2686058531 The device does not exist. Check and ensure that the
entered parameters are correct.

Example
To delete the device named 10.71.62.30, run the following command:

DEL-DEV::DEV=10.71.62.30:119::;

The result is as follows:


7340034 2005-06-08 16:39:39
M 119 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
;

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 111


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Related Command
None.

13.2.10 Resetting a Device (RESET-DEV)

Usage Note

NOTICE
l After a device is reset, all the boards of the device are reset. This results in temporary
interruption of the services.
l Save the data before resetting a device. Otherwise, the original data is lost.

When the system is faulty or the software needs to be upgraded, run this command after the
program package file and the matching database file are loaded.

Command Format
RESET-DEV::(DID=Device-ID|DEV=Device-name):CTAG::;

Supporting Device
Device Type No. Device Type

34 MA5680T

37 MA5662

44 MA5600V3

57 MA5606T

94 MA5603U

95 MA5603T

219 UA5000(PVM)

249 MA5600T

2320 MA5612A

2322 MA5621A
NOTE
The MA5621 V800R311C00 and later versions support this
command.

253 UA5000(IPMB)

2331 MA5608T

2340 MA5611S

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 112


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Device Type No. Device Type

2348 MA5683T

2350 MA5811S

2346/2349/2352/2353 MA5800-X17/MA5800-X7/MA5800-X15/MA5800-X2

Input Parameter
Paramete Type Range Description Default
r

DID INTEGER - Indicates the device ID. -

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the device name -


STRING by default. If the value of
the configuration item
DEVMEAN is 1, the DEV
parameter indicates the IP
address of the device. For
details about how to modify
configuration items, see
23.7 How to Locate a
Device According to the
IP Address.

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the operation command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.

Output Parameter
None.

Error Code
ID Description Solution

2686058531 The device does not exist. Check and ensure that the
entered ID, name, and IP
address of the device are
correct.

Example
To reset the device named 10.71.62.30, run the following command:

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 113


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

RESET-DEV::DEV=10.71.62.30:120::;

The result is as follows:


7340034 2005-06-08 16:39:39
M 120 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
;

Related Command
SAVE-DEV

13.2.11 Resetting a Board (RESET-BOARD)

Usage Note

NOTICE
l If the control board is reset, the system is also reset.
l If a board is reset, the related services are interrupted temporarily. Therefore, exercise
caution when performing this operation.

When the services of a board are abnormal or you need to locate test problems, run this
command.

Command Format
RESET-BOARD::(DID=Device-ID|DEV=Device-name),FN=frame-number,SN=slot-
number:CTAG::;

Supporting Device
Device Type No. Device Type

34 MA5680T

37 MA5662

44 MA5600V3

57 MA5606T

94 MA5603U

95 MA5603T

219 UA5000(PVM)

249 MA5600T

2320 MA5612A

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 114


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Device Type No. Device Type

2322 MA5621A
NOTE
The MA5621 V800R311C00 and later versions support this
command.

253 UA5000(IPMB)

2331 MA5608T

2340 MA5611S

2348 MA5683T

2350 MA5811S

2346/2349/2352/2353 MA5800-X17/MA5800-X7/MA5800-X15/MA5800-X2

Input Parameter
Parameter Type Range Description Defaul
t

DID INTEGER - Indicates the device ID. -

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the device -


STRING name by default. If the
value of the
configuration item
DEVMEAN is 1, the
DEV parameter
indicates the IP address
of the device. For
details about how to
modify configuration
items, see 23.7 How to
Locate a Device
According to the IP
Address.

FN INTEGER 0-255 Indicates the subrack -


ID.

SN INTEGER 0-35 Indicates the slot ID. -

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the operation command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 115


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Output Parameter
None.

Error Code
ID Description Solution

1615659120 The board is not supported this kind The board cannot be reset.
of function.

Example
To reset the board in slot 0 of shelf 0 of the device named 10.71.62.30, run the following
command:

RESET-BOARD::DEV=10.71.62.30,FN=0,SN=0:121::;

The result is as follows:


7340034 2005-06-08 16:39:39
M 121 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
;

Related Command
RESET-DEV

13.2.12 Changing the Device Name and Alias (MOD-DEV)

Usage Note
This command is used to change device names and aliases displayed on the U2000.

Command Format
MOD-DEV::(DID=Device-ID|DEV=Device-name):CTAG::[NAME=device-name][,ALIAS=device-
alias];

Supporting Device
For information about the supporting devices, see Table 24-1.

Input Parameter
Parameter Type Range Description Default

DID INTEGER - Indicates the device N/A


ID.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 116


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Parameter Type Range Description Default

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the N/A


STRING default device
name. If the value
of the configuration
item DEVMEAN
is 1, the DEV
parameter indicates
the IP address of
the device. For
details about how to
modify
configuration items,
see 23.7 How to
Locate a Device
According to the
IP Address.

NAME OCTET SIZE (32) Indicates the N/A


STRING default new device
name. If the value
of the configuration
item DEVMEAN
is 1, the DEV
parameter indicates
the IP address of
the device. For
details about how to
modify
configuration items,
see 23.7 How to
Locate a Device
According to the
IP Address.
If you do not set
this parameter, the
device name does
not change.

ALIAS OCTET SIZE (32) Indicates the new N/A


STRING device alias.
If you do not set
this parameter, the
device alias does
not change.

Response Format
This response format complies with that of the operation command provided in 11.3
Response Format Description.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 117


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Output Parameter
None.

Error Code
ID Description Solution

2686058531 The device does not exist. Ensure that the entered ID,
name, IP address, and alias
of the device are correct.

Example
To change the device name 10.71.62.41 to UAPVMV1 and the device alias to DevAlias, run
the following command:

MOD-DEV::DEV=10.71.62.41:1::NAME=UAPVMV1,ALIAS=DevAlias;

The result is as follows:


7340032 2006-08-24 22:05:11
M 1 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
;

Related Command
LST-DEV

13.2.13 Modifying the Shelf Name and Alias (MOD-FRAME)

Usage Note
None.

Command Format
MOD-FRAME::(DID=Device-ID|DEV=Device-name),FN=frame-num:CTAG::[NAME=frame-name]
[,ALIAS=frame-alias];

Supporting Device
Device Type No. Device Type

219 UA5000 (PVMV1)

253 UA5000 (IPMB)

249 MA5600T

94 MA5603U

95 MA5603T

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 118


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Device Type No. Device Type

34 MA5680T

2331 MA5608T

2348 MA5683T

2346/2349/2352/2353 MA5800-X17/MA5800-X7/MA5800-X15/MA5800-X2

Input Parameter

Table 13-1 Parameters required for modifying the shelf name and alias
Paramete Type Range Description Default
r

DID INTEGER - Indicates the -


device ID.

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the -


STRING device name by
default. If the
value of the
configuration
item DEVMEAN
is 1, the DEV
parameter
indicates the IP
address of the
device. For
details about how
to modify
configuration
items, see 23.7
How to Locate a
Device
According to the
IP Address.

FN INTEGER 0-512 Indicates the -


subrack ID.

NAME OCTET SIZE (32) Indicates the new -


STRING shelf name.
If you do not set
this parameter,
the shelf name
does not change.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 119


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Paramete Type Range Description Default


r

ALIAS OCTET SIZE (32) Indicates the new -


STRING shelf alias.
If you do not set
this parameter,
the shelf alias
does not change.

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the operation command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.

Output Parameter
None.

Error Code
ID Description Solution

1613758569 The resource does not Run the LST-FRAME command to


exist or its type is wrong. obtain the subrack ID and ensure that
the subrack ID is correct.

Example
To modify the name of shelf 1 of the device named 10.71.62.41 to FRAME1 and the alias for
the shelf to framealias, run the following command:
MOD-FRAME::DEV=10.71.62.41,FN=1:1::NAME=FRAME1,ALIAS=framealias;
The result is as follows:
7340032 2006-08-24 22:02:16
M 1 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
;

Related Command
LST-FRAME

13.2.14 Modifying the Slot Alias (MOD-SLOT)

Usage Note
A board must be inserted in the slot.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 120


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Command Format
MOD-SLOT::(DID=Device-ID|DEV=Device-name),FN=frame-num,SN=slot-num:CTAG::
[ALIAS=slot-alias];

Supporting Device
Device Type No. Device Type

219 UA5000 (PVMV1)

253 UA5000 (IPMB)

249 MA5600T

94 MA5603U

95 MA5603T

34 MA5680T

2331 MA5608T

2348 MA5683T

2346/2349/2352/2353 MA5800-X17/MA5800-X7/MA5800-X15/MA5800-X2

Input Parameter
Param Type Range Description Default
eter

DID INTEGER - Indicates the -


device ID.

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the -


STRING device name by
default. If the
value of the
configuration item
DEVMEAN is 1,
the DEV
parameter
indicates the IP
address of the
device. For details
about how to
modify
configuration
items, see 23.7
How to Locate a
Device According
to the IP
Address.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 121


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Param Type Range Description Default


eter

FN INTEGER 0-255 Indicates the -


subrack ID.

SN INTEGER 0-35 Indicates the slot -


ID.

ALIAS OCTET SIZE (32) Indicates the new -


STRING board alias.
If you do not set
this parameter, the
board alias does
not change.

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the operation command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.

Output Parameter
None.

Error Code
ID Description Solution

1613758569 The resource does not exist Run the LST-BOARD


or its type is wrong. command to check whether
the slot for the board exists.

Example
To modify the alias for slot 8 in shelf 0 of the device named UAPVMV1 to slotalias, run the
following command:

MOD-SLOT::DEV=UAPVMV1,FN=0,SN=3:1::ALIAS=slotalias;

The result is as follows:


7340033 2006-07-10 16:07:38
M 1 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
;

Related Command
LST-BOARD

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 122


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

13.2.15 Exporting a Resource File (DMP-INVENTORY)

Usage Note
l If the data volume is large, many system resources will be occupied by the command. In
a centralized system, a maximum of three export tasks can be run concurrently by
default. In a distributed system, only one export task is allowed at a time.
l This command supports the export of XML and CSV resource files. For details about
command usage, see Command Format.
l When you export the resource file, the type of an MA5683T is related to the
TL1_SHOW_MA5683T_SWITCH configuration item setting. For details about the
meaning and setting method of the configuration item, see Table 9-1.
l You can export different inventory resource types by setting the configuration item
NBI_INVENTORY_DUMP_VERSION. In addition, the directory and format of the
exported XML resource files are different. For details about the meaning and setting
method of the configuration item in a centralized system, see Table 9-1. For details
about the meaning and setting method of the configuration item in a distributed system,
see 10.4 Setting Configuration Items. For details about the directory and format of the
exported files, see Description of the directory and format of exported files.
l You can specify whether to export the version information about the inventory resources
by setting the configuration item CMMOREINFO.

Command Format
DMP-INVENTORY:::CTAG::[DT=device-type][,DEV=Device-name][,RES=resource-type]
[,TYPE=CSV][,FILEPREFIX=file-prefix];

NOTE

l If you need to export XML resource files and NBI_INVENTORY_DUMP_VERSION is 2, the


command format is DMP-INVENTORY:::CTAG::[DT=device-type].
l If you need to export XML resource files and NBI_INVENTORY_DUMP_VERSION is 3, the
command format is DMP-INVENTORY:::CTAG::[DT=device-type][,DEV=Device-name]
[,RES=resource-type].
l If you need to export XML resource files and NBI_INVENTORY_DUMP_VERSION is 4, the
command format is DMP-INVENTORY:::CTAG::[DEV=Device-name].
l If you need to export CSV resource files, the command format is DMP-
INVENTORY:::CTAG::TYPE=CSV[,FILEPREFIX=file-prefix].

Supporting Device
Device Type No. Device Type

34 MA5680T

37 MA5662

44 MA5600V3

94 MA5603U

95 MA5603T

100 MA5616

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 123


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Device Type No. Device Type

219 UA5000(PVM)

249 MA5600T

253 UA5000(IPMB)

2330 MA5633

2331 MA5608T

2339 MA5818

2340 MA5611S

2326 MA5623A

2348 MA5683T

2350 MA5811S

2346/2349/2352/2353 MA5800-X17/MA5800-X7/MA5800-X15/MA5800-X2

Input Parameter
Param Type Range Description Defa
eter ult

DT Intege See Indicates the device type. N/A


r Supporting
Device.

DEV OCTE SIZE (192) Indicates the default device name. If the N/A
T value of the configuration item DEVMEAN
STRI is 1, the DEV parameter indicates the IP
NG address of the device. For details about how
to modify configuration items, see 23.7 How
to Locate a Device According to the IP
Address.
NOTE
The resource information about a specified device
can be exported to a file only when the
NBI_INVENTORY_DUMP_VERSION
configuration item is set to 3 or 4.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 124


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Param Type Range Description Defa


eter ult

RES OCTE l ME Indicates the resource type. ME,S


T l SHELF If you do not enter this parameter, data of all HELF,
STRI resource types is exported. CARD
NG l CARD ,DAU
l DAUGHT The options are as follows: GTHE
ERCARD l ME: devices RCAR
l PORT l SHELF: subracks Dand
PORT
l POTS l CARD: boards
l BRA l DAUGHTERCARD: daughter boards
l LAG l PORT: ports
l ADSL l POTS: PSTN users
l VDSL l BRA: BRA ports
l ONT l LAG: Ethernet aggregation groups
l SERVICE l ADSL: ADSL ports
PORT l VDSL: VDSL ports
l VLANOF l ONT: GPON ONT devices
LAG
l SERVICEPORT: service virtual ports
l ETH
l VLANOFLAG: Ethernet aggregation
l PORTOF groups in a VLAN
VLAN
l ETH: Ethernet ports
l CABLEM
ODEM l PORTOFVLAN: List of ports in a VLAN

l CMC l CABLEMODEM: CM terminal resources


l CMC: CMC devices. Example: MA5633
NOTE
l The resource information about a specified
resource type can be exported to a file only
when the
NBI_INVENTORY_DUMP_VERSION
parameter is set to 3.
l This parameter can be set to one or more
values at a time.
l The LAG parameter is applicable only to the
following devices: MA5600T, MA5680T,
MA5662, MA5600 V300, MA5603U,
MA5603T and UA5000 (IPMB).
l The PORTOFVLAN parameter is applicable
only to the following devices: MA5600T,
MA5680T, MA5608T, MA5603U, MA5603T,
MA5600V3, MA5662, MA5616, MA5611S,
MA5623A and UA5000 (IPMB).
l The CMC parameter is applicable only to the
following devices: MA5600T, MA5603T,
MA5608T, MA5680T and MA5633.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 125


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Param Type Range Description Defa


eter ult

TYPE OCTE CSV Indicates the format of the exported file. N/A
T This parameter is exclusive to the DT, DEV,
STRI and RES parameters. After this parameter is
NG set, multiple CSV files will be exported based
on the resource types, including the following
five types:
l container_info_yyyy-mm-dd_hh-mm-
ss.csv: device information file
l shelf_info_yyyy-mm-dd_hh-mm-ss.csv:
subrack information file
l slot_info_yyyy-mm-dd_hh-mm-ss.csv:
slot information file
l port_info_yyyy-mm-dd_hh-mm-ss.csv:
port information file
l service_port_yyyy-mm-dd_hh-mm-ss.csv:
logic information file
If the size of a CSV file exceeds 100 MB,
another CSV file will be created. If multiple
CSV files are created, they are named in the
format port_info_yyyy-mm-dd_hh-mm-
ss_n_m.csv, where n indicates the file serial
number and m indicates the total number of
files.
If the size of data on ports is 260 MB, three
CSV files are generated and named as
follows:
l port_info_2010-12-28_02-02-05_1_3.csv
(100 MB)
l port_info_2010-12-28_02-02-05_2_3.csv
(100 MB)
l port_info_2010-12-28_02-02-05_3_3.csv
(60 MB)
In addition, you can enter a prefix in the file
name. Use a device data file as an example. If
the FILEPREFIX parameter is set to ftth,
the file name changes to
ftth_container_info_yyyy-mm-dd_hh-mm-
ss.csv.

FILEP OCTE SIZE (32) Indicates the file prefix. This parameter is N/A
REFIX T available only when the TYPE parameter is
STRI set to CSV. Use a device data file as an
NG example. If the FILEPREFIX parameter is
set to ftth, the file name changes to
ftth_container_info_yyyy-mm-dd_hh-mm-
ss.csv.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 126


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Response Format
This response format complies with that of the operation command provided in 11.3
Response Format Description.
title=" Path information of the device-type "+device-type
name of attributes:PATH

Output Parameter
Parameter Type Range Description

PATH OCTET SIZE (255) Indicates the path of the


STRING resource file.

Description of the directory and format of exported files:


In a distributed system, multiple resource files are exported to the oss\server\var\dump\tl1
directory on the NM. In a centralized system, the export directory of resource files varies with
the value of the configuration item NBI_INVENTORY_DUMP_VERSION. In distributed
and centralized systems, the format of exported files also varies with the value of the
configuration item.
l NBI_INVENTORY_DUMP_VERSION=2 (default value): The export directory of
resource files is oss\server\nemgr\nemgr_access\conf\bmscommon\resxml. The
format of exported files is as follows:

l NBI_INVENTORY_DUMP_VERSION=3: The export directory of resource files is


oss\server\nemgr\nemgr_access\dump\. The format of exported files is as follows:

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 127


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

l NBI_INVENTORY_DUMP_VERSION=4: The export directory of resource files is


oss\server\nemgr\nemgr_access\dump_xml\. The format of exported files is as
follows:

Error Code
None.

Example
l In a centralized system
– (NBI_INVENTORY_DUMP_VERSION=2) Example 1: To export the resource
file of all the MA5680T, run the following command:
DMP-INVENTORY:::CTAG::DT=34;
The result is as follows:
0 2011-06-13 15:09:20
M CTAG COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
blktag=1
blkcount=1

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 128


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

blktotal=1

Path information of the device-type MA5680T


---------
PATH
server : d:\oss\server\nemgr\nemgr_access\conf\bmscommon\resxml
\ofa5920v3_2011-06-13_07-09-16.xml
---------

– (NBI_INVENTORY_DUMP_VERSION=3) Example 2: To export the resource


file of ONTs on the device named 10.78.217.114, run the following command:
DMP-INVENTORY:::CTAG::DT=34,DEV=10.78.217.114,RES=ONT;
The result is as follows:
0 2011-06-13 15:13:46
M CTAG COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
blktag=1
blkcount=1
blktotal=1

Path information of the device-type MA5680T


---------
PATH
server : d:\oss\server\nemgr\nemgr_access\dump\MA5680T_10.78.217.114.xml
---------

– (NBI_INVENTORY_DUMP_VERSION=4) Example 3: To export the resource


file of the device named 10.78.217.114, run the following command:
DMP-INVENTORY:::CTAG::DEV=10.78.217.114;
The result is as follows:
0 2011-06-13 15:13:46
M CTAG COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
blktag=1
blkcount=1
blktotal=1

Path information of all device-type


---------
PATH
server : d:\oss\server\nemgr\nemgr_access\dump_xml
\10.70.35.236_MA5680T_7340034_20110613074004.xml
---------

l In a distributed system
(NBI_INVENTORY_DUMP_VERSION=2) Example 4: To export the resource file of
all the MA5680T, run the following command:
DMP-INVENTORY:::CTAG::DT=34;
The result is as follows:
0 2014-06-28 22:05:03
M CTAG COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
blktag=1

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 129


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

blkcount=2
blktotal=2

Path information of the device-type MA5680T


---------
PATH
server : /opt/oss/server/var/dump/tl1/em_168_MA5680T_2014-06-28_14-05-0.xml
server : /opt/oss/server/var/dump/tl1/em_ccx_MA5680T_2014-06-28_06-09-0.xml
---------

Related Command
There is no related command.

13.2.16 Exporting Service Port Statistics to Files (DMP-E2EPERF)

Usage Note
The configuration item DUMP_MAX_FILE_SIZE controls the size of each file, and
DUMP_MAX_FILE_SAVE_NUM controls the maximum number of files. For details about
the meaning and setting method of the configuration item, see Table 9-2.

Command Format
DMP-E2EPERF:::CTAG::DT=device-type[,DEV=Device-name];

Supporting Device
Device Type No. Device Type

249 MA5600T

30 MA5605

34 MA5680T

37 MA5662

44 MA5600V3

71 MA5105

72 MA5100V2

74 MA5300V1

95 MA5603T

82 UA5000

86 MA5100V1

92 MA5652G

94 MA5603U

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 130


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Device Type No. Device Type

96 MA5620

97 MA5626

100 MA5616

103 MA5635

104 MA5612

232 MA5680T

2331 MA5608T

2346/2349/2352/2353 MA5800-X17/MA5800-X7/MA5800-X15/MA5800-X2

Input Parameter
Paramet Type Range Description Default
er

DT INTEGER See Supporting Indicates the device -


Device. type.

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the device -


STRING name.If the value of
the configuration item
DEVMEAN is 1, the
DEV parameter
indicates the IP
address of the device.
For details about how
to modify
configuration items,
see 23.7 How to
Locate a Device
According to the IP
Address.

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the query command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.
title="Path information of the device-type "+device-type
name of attributes: PATH

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 131


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Output Parameter
Parameter Type Range Description

PATH OCTET SIZE (255) Indicates the prefix of the file


STRING path. The file name is similar to
e2e_MA5600T_2013-10-17_23-1
4-09_n_m.csv, where n indicates
the sequence number of a file and
m indicates the total number of
files.

Error Code
ID Description Solution

1615003650 Incorrect Set DT to a supported value.


parameter
input.

Example
Export the service port statistics of an MA5600T to files.
l Run the following command:
DMP-E2EPERF:::1::DT=249;
l The result is as follows:
-1 2013-10-17 23:14:24
M 1 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
blktag=1
blkcount=1
blktotal=1

Path information of the device-type MA5600T


---------
PATH
server : d:/oss/server/var/access/dumpperf/e2e_MA5600T_2013-10-17_23-14-09
---------
;

Related Command
None.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 132


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

13.2.17 Exporting Ethernet Port Statistics to Files (DMP-


ETHPERF)
Usage Note
The configuration item DUMP_MAX_FILE_SIZE controls the size of each file, and
DUMP_MAX_FILE_SAVE_NUM controls the maximum number of files. For details about
the meaning and setting method of the configuration item, see Table 9-2.

Command Format
DMP-ETHPERF:::CTAG::DT=device-type[,DEV=Device-name];

Supporting Device
Device Type No. Device Type

249 MA5600T

30 MA5605

34 MA5680T

37 MA5662

44 MA5600V3

71 MA5105

72 MA5100V2

74 MA5300V1

95 MA5603T

82 UA5000

86 MA5100V1

92 MA5652G

94 MA5603U

96 MA5620

97 MA5626

100 MA5616

103 MA5635

104 MA5612

232 MA5680T

2331 MA5608T

2346/2349/2352/2353 MA5800-X17/MA5800-X7/MA5800-X15/MA5800-X2

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 133


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Input Parameter
Paramet Type Range Description Default
er

DT INTEGER See Supporting Indicates the device -


Device. type.

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the device -


STRING name.If the value of
the configuration item
DEVMEAN is 1, the
DEV parameter
indicates the IP
address of the device.
For details about how
to modify
configuration items,
see 23.7 How to
Locate a Device
According to the IP
Address.

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the query command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.
title="Path information of the device-type "+device-type
name of attributes: PATH

Output Parameter
Parameter Type Range Description

PATH OCTET SIZE (255) Indicates the prefix of the file


STRING path. The file name is similar to
eth_MA5600T_2013-10-17_23-1
4-09_n_m.csv, where n indicates
the sequence number of a file and
m indicates the total number of
files.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 134


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Error Code
ID Description Solution

1615003650 Incorrect Set DT to a supported value.


parameter
input.

Example
Export the Ethernet port statistics of an MA5600T to files.

l Run the following command:


DMP-ETHPERF:::1::DT=249;
l The result is as follows:
-1 2013-10-17 23:14:24
M 1 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
blktag=1
blkcount=1
blktotal=1

Path information of the device-type MA5600T


---------
PATH
server : d:/oss/server/var/access/dumpperf/eth_MA5600T_2013-10-17_23-14-09
---------
;

Related Command
None.

13.2.18 Exporting PON Port Statistics to Files (DMP-PONPERF)

Usage Note
The size of the file to be exported cannot succeed 100 MB.

Command Format
DMP-PONPERF:::CTAG::DT=device-type[,DEV=Device-name];

Supporting Device
Device Type No. Device Type

249 MA5600T

30 MA5605

34 MA5680T

37 MA5662

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 135


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Device Type No. Device Type

44 MA5600V3

71 MA5105

72 MA5100V2

74 MA5300V1

95 MA5603T

82 UA5000

86 MA5100V1

92 MA5652G

94 MA5603U

96 MA5620

97 MA5626

100 MA5616

103 MA5635

104 MA5612

232 MA5680T

2331 MA5608T

2346/2349/2352/2353 MA5800-X17/MA5800-X7/MA5800-X15/MA5800-X2

Input Parameter
Paramet Type Range Description Default
er

DT INTEGER See Supporting Indicates the device -


Device. type.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 136


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Paramet Type Range Description Default


er

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the device -


STRING name.If the value of
the configuration item
DEVMEAN is 1, the
DEV parameter
indicates the IP
address of the device.
For details about how
to modify
configuration items,
see 23.7 How to
Locate a Device
According to the IP
Address.

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the query command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.
title="Path information of the device-type "+device-type
name of attributes: PATH

Output Parameter
Parameter Type Range Description

PATH OCTET SIZE (255) Indicates the prefix of the file


STRING path. The file name is similar to
pon_MA5600T_2013-10-17_23-
14-09_n_m.csv, where n
indicates the sequence number of
a file and m indicates the total
number of files.
NOTE
If only one file exists, n and m are
not set. For example,
pon_MA5600T_2014-03-31_16-19-
30.CSV.

Error Code
ID Description Solution

2686058554 Command does not support Set DT to a supported value.


this device type

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 137


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Example
Export the Ethernet port statistics of an MA5600T to files.

l Run the following command:


DMP-PONPERF:::CTAG::DT=249;
l The result is as follows:
-1 2013-10-17 23:14:24
M CTAG COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
blktag=1
blkcount=1
blktotal=1

Path information of the device-type MA5600T


---------
PATH
server : d:/oss/server/var/access/dumpperf/pon_MA5600T_2013-10-17_23-14-09.csv
---------
;

Related Command
None.

13.2.19 Adding a Device (ADD-DEV)

Usage Note
l This command is used to add new devices to the subnets on the U2000.
l The SNMP parameters on the U2000 must be the same as the SNMP parameters on the
device. For example, the protocol versions must be the same. Using SNMPv3 is
recommended because of its higher security than SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c.
l The IP addresses of the devices on the U2000 must be different.
l Ensure that the SNMP parameter profile has been created. Choose Administration > NE
Communicate Parameter > Default Access Protocol Parameters (traditional style)
from the main menu or select Fix-Network NE Configuration in Application Center
and choose Administration > NE Communicate Parameter > Default Access
Protocol Parameters (application style) from the main menu. In the dialog box that is
displayed, create an SNMP Profile according to the different SNMP version.

Command Format
ADD-DEV::DEV=Device-name[,DT=deviceType],DEVIP=device-IP:CTAG::
[NAMESEQUENCE=Sequence of subnet name][,SNMPPROF=parameter profile of snmp]
[,SNMPVER=Snmp-Version];

Supporting Device
Device Type No. Device Type

37 MA5662
NOTE
The MA5662 V800R309C00 and later versions support this
command.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 138


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Device Type No. Device Type

100 MA5616
MA5616 V800R308C00 and later versions

104 MA5612

253 UA5000 (IPMB)

34 MA5680T

94 MA5603U

95 MA5603T

2319 MA5621
NOTE
The MA5621 V800R309C00 and later versions support this
command.

2313 MA5652
NOTE
The MA5652 V800R309C00 and later versions support this
command.

2320 MA5612A

2322 MA5621A
NOTE
The MA5621 V800R311C00 and later versions support this
command.

2323 MA5622A (V800R311C00 and later versions)

2324 MA5623 (V800R311C00 and later versions)

249 MA5600T

2331 MA5608T

2339 MA5818

2343 MA5694S

2340 MA5611S

2348 MA5683T

2350 MA5811S

2351 MA5878

2346/2349/2352/2353 MA5800-X17/MA5800-X7/MA5800-X15/MA5800-X2

2354 EDFA3220-D

2561 Third-Party SNMP Device

2562 Third-Party ICMP Device

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 139


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Input Parameter
Para Type Range Description Default
mete
r

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the device name by -


STRING default. If the value of the
configuration item DEVMEAN
is 1, the DEV parameter
indicates the IP address of the
device. For details about how to
modify configuration items, see
23.7 How to Locate a Device
According to the IP Address.

DT Integer See Supporting Indicates the device type. -


Device.
NOTE
To view the
MDU type that
supports
decoupling, see
the value of the
typeid parameter
in the oss\server
\nemgr
\nemgr_access
\dcp\pnp
\product\device
type\device
type.xml file.

DEV IPADDR - Indicates the IP address of the -


IP ESS device.

NAM OCTET SIZE (1024) Indicates the sequence of subnet -


ESE STRING names. Names of subnets in
QUE different layers are separated by
NCE backslash (\), for example, \HW
\F4. In a distributed system, the
parameter value is in the format
of \EM subnet name on the
NM\Subnet name sequence on
the EM, for example,
\EmSubmapem_184\HW\F4.
If the subnet exists, add the new
device to the subnet. Otherwise,
create a subnet and add the new
device to the subnet.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 140


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Para Type Range Description Default


mete
r

SNM OCTET SIZE (64) Indicates the name of the SNMP -


PPR STRING parameter profile.
OF

SNM OCTET l V1(v1) Indicates the SNMP protocol. It -


PVE STRING l V2(v2) must be the same as that on the
R device.Using SNMPv3 is
l V3(v3) recommended because of its
higher security than SNMPv1
and SNMPv2c. The meanings of
the options are as follows:
l V1(v1): Indicates the SNMP
V1 protocol.
l V2(v2): Indicates the SNMP
V2c protocol.
l V3(v3): Indicates the SNMP
V3 protocol.
NOTE
Using SNMPv3 is recommended
because of its higher security than
SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c.
The value of this parameter is case
insensitive. For example, to use the
SNMP V1 protocol, you can enter
either V1 or v1.

NOTE

l The DEV parameter is mandatory.


l The DT parameter is mandatory.
l The SNMPPROF parameter (SNMP profile) is optional. If this parameter is not set, the default
SNMP profile is used.
l The SNMPVER parameter is optional. If this parameter is not set, the SNMP V1 protocol is used by
default.

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the operation command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.

Output Parameter
None.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 141


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Error Code
ID Description Solution

67108590 The same name sub map has Modify the device name in the
existed. command and ensure that the
device name is unique.

1613758516 Device already exists Change the IP address of the


required device.

Example
To add a UA5000 (IPMB) that uses the default SNMP profile and whose name and IP address
are UA5000IPMB and 10.71.56.153 respectively, run the following command:
ADD-DEV::DEV=UA5000IPMB,DT=253,DEVIP=10.71.56.153:2::;
The result is as follows:
7340034 2005-06-08 16:39:39
M 2 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
;

Related Command
None.

13.2.20 Adding a Board (ADD-BOARD)


Usage Note
A board can be added successfully only when the slot for the board is idle.

Command Format
ADD-BOARD::(DID=Device-ID|DEV=Device-
name),FN=FrameID,SN=SlotID:CTAG::BTDETAIL=BoardType[,SLOTNAME=BoardName];

Supporting Device
Device Type No. Device Type

34 MA5680T

44 MA5600V3

94 MA5603U

2331 MA5608T

2348 MA5683T

2346/2349/2352/2353 MA5800-X17/MA5800-X7/MA5800-X15/MA5800-X2

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 142


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Input Parameter
Parameter Type Range Description Default

DID INTEGER - Indicates the -


device ID.

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the -


STRING device name by
default. If the
value of the
configuration
item
DEVMEAN is
1, the DEV
parameter
indicates the IP
address of the
device. For
details about
how to modify
configuration
items, see 23.7
How to Locate
a Device
According to
the IP Address.

FN INTEGER 0-255 Indicates the -


subrack ID.

SN INTEGER 0-35 Indicates the slot -


ID.

BTDETAIL OCTET See 24.2 Indicates the -


STRING Parameters type of the
Related To the board.
Board Type.

SLOTNAME OCTET SIZE (32) Indicates the -


STRING alias of the
board.

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the operation command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.

Output Parameter
None.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 143


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Error Code
ID Description Solution

2689009240 A board has already existed Check whether the


configuration data of the
board needs to be deleted.
Then, run the DEL-
BOARD command to delete
the board and add the
required board.

Example
To add a board named H801GPBC to slot 4 in shelf 0 of the device named 10.71.62.48, run
the following command:

ADD-
BOARD::DEV=10.71.62.48,FN=0,SN=4:120::BTDETAIL=H801GPBC,SLOTNAME=H
801GPBC;

The result is as follows:


7340034 2005-06-08 16:39:39
M 120 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
;

Related Command
DEL-BOARD

13.2.21 Deleting a Board (DEL-BOARD)

Usage Note

NOTICE
This operation is not retrievable. Exercise caution when running the command, because the
data of the board is cleared after this command is executed.

l Only the board that is not configured with service data can be deleted successfully.
l The DEV (IP address of an OLT) and ONULOCATEINFO parameters can be used as
the location information. Before using these two parameters as the location information,
make sure that the DEV parameter indicates the IP address of the device. For details, see
23.7 How to Locate a Device According to the IP Address.

Command Format
DEL-BOARD::(DID=Device-ID|DEV=Device-name|(DEV=device-olt-
ipaddress,ONULOCATEINFO=onu-locate-infomation)),FN=FrameID,SN=SlotID:CTAG::;

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 144


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Supporting Device
Device Type No. Device Type

44 MA5600V3

34 MA5680T

94 MA5603U

2331 MA5608T

2348 MA5683T

2346/2349/2352/2353 MA5800-X17/MA5800-X7/MA5800-X15/MA5800-X2

Input Parameter
Param Type Range Description Default
eter

DID INTEGE - Indicates the device ID. -


R

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the device name by -


STRING default. If the value of the
configuration item DEVMEAN is
1, the DEV parameter indicates the
IP address of the device. For details
about how to modify configuration
items, see 23.7 How to Locate a
Device According to the IP
Address.
If you set both the DEV and
ONULOCATEINFO parameters
for an ONU, that is, enter
DEV=device-olt-
ipaddress,ONULOCATEINFO=o
nu-locate-infomation, the DEV
parameter indicates the IP address
of the OLT.

ONUL OCTET SIZE (128) Indicates the ONU location -


OCAT STRING information. This parameter is used
EINFO with the DEV parameter (IP
address of the OLT).
The format is subrack ID/slot ID/
port ID/ONU ID. For example,
0/2/0/0 indicates the ONU 0 that is
connected to port slot 0/2/0.

FN INTEGE 0-255 Indicates the subrack ID. -


R

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 145


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Param Type Range Description Default


eter

SN INTEGE 0-35 Indicates the slot ID. -


R

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the operation command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.

Output Parameter
None.

Error Code
ID Description Solution

2686058554 Command does not support Run the LST-DEV


this device type command to check whether
the entered device type is
MA5600V3, MA5680T or
MA5603U..

2689009257 Deleting board failure, as Delete the corresponding


service connections or service configuration and
correlative data (for then delete the board again.
example, dissociative VL,
CES channel, FR iwf) exists

Example
To delete the board in slot 4 of shelf 0 of the device named 10.71.62.48, run the following
command:

DEL-BOARD::DEV=10.71.62.48,FN=0,SN=4:120::;

The result is as follows:


7340034 2005-06-08 16:39:39
M 120 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
;

Related Command
None.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 146


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

13.2.22 Disabling a Board (DISABLE-BOARD)

Usage Note
l The DISABLE-BOARD command is applicable only to the board that is enabled.
l The DISABLE-BOARD command is not applicable to the board that is automatically
discovered.
l The DISABLE-BOARD command is not applicable to the control board.

Command Format
DISABLE-BOARD::(DID=Device-ID|DEV=Device-name),FN=frame-number,SN=slot-
number:CTAG::;

Supporting Device
Device Type No. Device Type

44 MA5600V3

94 MA5603U

Input Parameter
Parameter Type Range Description Default

DID INTEGER - Indicates the -


device ID.

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the -


STRING device name by
default. If the
value of the
configuration item
DEVMEAN is 1,
the DEV
parameter
indicates the IP
address of the
device. For details
about how to
modify
configuration
items, see 23.7
How to Locate a
Device
According to the
IP Address.

FN INTEGER 0-255 Indicates the -


subrack ID.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 147


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Parameter Type Range Description Default

SN INTEGER 0-35 Indicates the slot -


ID.

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the operation command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.

Output Parameter
None.

Error Code
ID Description Solution

2686058498 Missing, invalid parameter Check and ensure that the


or mandatory parameter is entered parameters are
null, or Value of parameter correct.
is wrong

2686058554 Command does not support Run the LST-DEV


this device type command to check whether
the entered device type is
MA5600V3.

2686058531 The device does not exist. The device does not exist.
Check and ensure that the IP
address of the required
device is correct.

Example
To disable the board in slot 0 of shelf 0 of the device named 10.71.62.30, run the following
command:

DISABLE-BOARD::DEV=10.71.62.30,FN=0,SN=0:121::;

The result is as follows:


7340034 2005-06-08 16:39:39
M 121 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
;

Related Command
l LST-DEV
l LST-BOARD

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 148


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

l ENABLE-BOARD

13.2.23 Enabling a Board (ENABLE-BOARD)

Usage Note
l This command cannot be executed on the control board.
l Only the board that is disabled or configured can be enabled.

Command Format
ENABLE-BOARD::(DID=Device-ID|DEV=Device-name),FN=frame-number,SN=slot-
number:CTAG::;

Supporting Device
Device Type No. Device Type

44 MA5600V3

94 MA5603U

Input Parameter

Table 13-2 Parameters required for enabling a board


Parameter Type Range Description Default

DID INTEGER - Indicates the -


device ID.

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the -


STRING device name by
default. If the
value of the
configuration item
DEVMEAN is 1,
the DEV
parameter
indicates the IP
address of the
device. For details
about how to
modify
configuration
items, see 23.7
How to Locate a
Device According
to the IP Address.

FN INTEGER 0-255 Indicates the -


subrack ID.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 149


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Parameter Type Range Description Default

SN INTEGER 0-35 Indicates the slot -


ID.

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the operation command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.

Output Parameter
None.

Error Code
ID Description Solution

2686058554 Command does not support Run the LST-DEV


this device type command to check whether
the entered device type is
MA5600V3.

2688746400 Board not prohibited and Run the LST-BOARD


cannot be enabled command to check whether
the board is disabled. Only
the disabled board can be
enabled.

2688746402 Cannot prohibit or rescue -


main board

2688746483 The board has not been Run the LST-BOARD


configured command to check whether
the board is configured.

Example
To enable the board in slot 0 of shelf 0 of the device named 10.71.62.30, run the following
command:

ENABLE-BOARD::DEV=10.71.62.30,FN=0,SN=0:121::;

The result is as follows:

234567 2005-06-08 16:39:39


M 121 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 150


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Related Command
l LST-DEV
l LST-BOARD
l DISABLE-BOARD

13.2.24 Confirming a Board (CONFIRM-BOARD)


Usage Note
This command is used to confirm only the board that is in the auto-discovered state.

Command Format
CONFIRM-BOARD::(DID=Device-ID|DEV=Device-name),FN=frame-number,SN=slot-
number:CTAG::;

Supporting Device
Device Type No. Device Type

44 MA5600V3

94 MA5603U

Input Parameter
Parameter Type Range Description Default

DID INTEGER - Indicates the -


device ID.

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the -


STRING device name by
default. If the
value of the
configuration
item
DEVMEAN is
1, the DEV
parameter
indicates the IP
address of the
device. For
details about
how to modify
configuration
items, see 23.7
How to Locate
a Device
According to
the IP Address.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 151


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Parameter Type Range Description Default

FN INTEGER 0-255 Indicates the -


subrack ID.

SN INTEGER 0-35 Indicates the slot -


ID.

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the operation command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.

Output Parameter
None.

Error Code
ID Description Solution

2686058554 Command does not support Run the LST-DEV


this device type command to check whether
the entered device type is
MA5600V3.

2688746481 The board has been Run the LST-BOARD


confirmed command to check whether
the board is in the auto-
discovered state. Only the
board in the auto-discovered
state can be confirmed.

Example
To confirm the board in slot 0 of shelf 0 of the device named 10.71.62.30, run the following
command:
CONFIRM-BOARD::DEV=10.71.62.30,FN=0,SN=0:121::;
The result is as follows:

7340034 2005-06-08 16:39:39


M 121 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 152


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Related Command
l LST-DEV
l LST-BOARD

13.2.25 Switching Over the Active and Standby Control Boards


(SYSTEM-SWITCH)
Usage Note
The standby control board must be inserted and run in the normal state.

Command Format
SYSTEM-SWITCH::(DID=Device-ID|DEV=Device-name):CTAG::;

Supporting Device
Device Type No. Device Type

34 MA5680T

249 MA5600T

2331 MA5608T

2348 MA5683T

2346/2349/2352/2353 MA5800-X17/MA5800-X7/MA5800-X15/MA5800-X2

Input Parameter
Parameter Type Range Description Default

DID INTEGER - Indicates the -


device ID.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 153


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Parameter Type Range Description Default

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the -


STRING device name by
default. If the
value of the
configuration
item
DEVMEAN is
1, the DEV
parameter
indicates the IP
address of the
device. For
details about
how to modify
configuration
items, see 23.7
How to Locate
a Device
According to
the IP
Address.

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the operation command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.

Output Parameter
None.

Error Code
ID Description Solution

2689008524 Standby board fault or not Repair or insert the standby


exist control board.

Example
To switch over the active and standby control boards of the device named 10.71.62.48, run the
following command:
SYSTEM-SWITCH::DEV=10.71.62.48:120::;
The result is as follows:
7340034 2005-06-08 16:39:39
M 120 COMPLD

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 154


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
;

Related Command
None.

13.2.26 Activating a CATV Port (ACT-CATVPORT)


Usage Note
There is no usage note.

Command Format
ACT-CATVPORT::(DID=Device-ID|DEV=Device-name)(,FN=Frame-num)(,SN=Slot-num)
(,SSN=SubBoard-num)(,PN=Port-num):CTAG::;

Supporting Device
Device Type No. Device Type

92 MA5652G

Input Parameter
Parame Type Range Description Default
ter

DID INTEGER - Indicates the device ID. N/A

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the default device N/A


STRING name. If the value of the
configuration item
DEVMEAN is 1, the DEV
parameter indicates the IP
address of the device. For
details about how to modify
configuration items, see 23.7
How to Locate a Device
According to the IP
Address.

FN INTEGER 0-255 (Optional) Indicates the N/A


subrack ID.

SN INTEGER 0-35 (Optional) Indicates the slot N/A


ID.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 155


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Parame Type Range Description Default


ter

SSN INTEGER 0-63,65535 (Mandatory) Indicates the N/A


NOTE daughter board ID.
If no daughter
board exists, set
this parameter to
65535.

PN INTEGER 0-63 (Mandatory) Indicates the N/A


port ID.

Response Format
This response format complies with that of the operation command provided in 11.3
Response Format Description.

Output Parameter
There in no output parameter.

Error Code
ID Description Solution

2686058497 Command syntax error Check the command according to


the "Command Format". Ensure
that parameters are entered in
correct order and symbols (such
as : = , and ;) in the command are
correct English symbols.

2686058499 Unknown command Check whether the command


word is correct. If it is incorrect,
change it to ACT-CATVPORT
and reissue it.

2686058801 The device does not exist The device does not exist. In this
case, ensure that the device IP
address is correct.

2686058554 Command does not support Ensure that the command supports
this device type the entered device name or IP
address.

Example
To activate CATV port 0/1/2 on the device named 10.71.211.85, run the following command:
ACT-CATVPORT::DEV=10.71.211.85,FN=0,SN=1,SSN=65535,PN=2:2::;

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 156


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

The result is as follows:


7340034 2009-09-08 16:39:39
M 2 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
;

Related Command
DACT-CATVPORT

13.2.27 Deactivating a CATV Port (DACT-CATVPORT)

Usage Note
There is no usage note.

Command Format
DACT-CATVPORT::(DID=Device-ID|DEV=Device-name)(,FN=Frame-num)(,SN=Slot-num)
(,SSN=SubBoard-num)(,PN=Port-num):CTAG::;

Supporting Device
Device Type No. Device Type

92 MA5652G

Input Parameter
Paramete Type Range Description Default
r

DID INTEGER - Indicates the device ID. N/A

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the default N/A


STRING device name. If the value
of the configuration item
DEVMEAN is 1, the
DEV parameter indicates
the IP address of the
device. For details about
how to modify
configuration items, see
23.7 How to Locate a
Device According to the
IP Address.

FN INTEGER 0-255 (Optional) Indicates the N/A


subrack ID.

SN INTEGER 0-35 (Optional) Indicates the N/A


slot ID.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 157


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Paramete Type Range Description Default


r

SSN INTEGER 0-63, 65535 (Mandatory) Indicates the N/A


NOTE daughter board ID.
If no daughter
board exists, set
this parameter to
65535.

PN INTEGER 0-63 (Mandatory) Indicates the N/A


port ID.

Response Format
This response format complies with that of the operation command provided in 11.3
Response Format Description.

Output Parameter
None.

Error Code
ID Description Solution

2686058497 Command syntax error Check the command according to the


"Command Format". Ensure that
parameters are entered in correct
order and symbols (such as : = ,
and ;) in the command are correct
English symbols.

2686058499 Unknown command Check whether the command word is


correct. If it is incorrect, change it to
DACT-CATVPORT and reissue it.

2686058801 The device does not exist The device does not exist. In this
case, ensure that the device IP
address is correct.

2686058554 Command does not support Ensure that the command supports
this device type the entered device name or IP
address.

Example
To deactivate CATV port 0/1/2 on the device named 10.71.211.85, run the following
command:
DACT-CATVPORT::DEV=10.71.211.85,FN=0,SN=1,SSN=65535,PN=2:2::;

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 158


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

The result is as follows:


7340034 2009-09-08 16:39:39
M 2 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
;

Related Command
ACT-CATVPORT

13.2.28 Changing a Device IP Address (MOD-DEVIP)

Usage Note
This command is used to change a device IP address on the U2000 if a user has changed the
IP address of this device.

Command Format
MOD-DEVIP::(DID=Device-ID|DEV=Device-name|DEVIP=device-IP):CTAG::NEWDEVIP=device-
IP;

Supporting Device
Device Type No. Device Type

37 MA5662
NOTE
The MA5662 V800R309C00 and later versions support this
command.

44 MA5600v3

249 MA5600T

94 MA5603U

95 MA5603T

2319 MA5621
NOTE
The MA5621 V800R309C00 and later versions support this
command.

2313 MA5652
NOTE
The MA5652 V800R309C00 and later versions support this
command.

2322 MA5621A
NOTE
The MA5621 V800R311C00 and later versions support this
command.

2323 MA5622A (V800R311C00 and later versions)

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 159


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Device Type No. Device Type

2324 MA5623 (V800R311C00 and later versions)

34 MA5680T

2331 MA5608T

2348 MA5683T

2346/2349/2352/2353 MA5800-X17/MA5800-X7/MA5800-X15/MA5800-X2

Input Parameter
Parame Type Range Description Default
ter

DID INTEGER - Indicates the device ID. N/A

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the default device N/A


STRING name. If the value of the
configuration item DEVMEAN
is 1, the DEV parameter
indicates the IP address of the
device. For details about how to
modify configuration items, see
23.7 How to Locate a Device
According to the IP Address.

DEVIP OCTET SIZE (32) Indicates the device IP address. N/A


STRING

NEWD OCTET SIZE (32) Indicates the new IP address of N/A


EVIP STRING the device.

Response Format
This response format complies with that of the operation command provided in 11.3
Response Format Description.

Output Parameter
The IP address of the device must be valid.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 160


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Error Code
ID Description Solution

2686058498 Missing, invalid parameter Ensure that the command is proper


or mandatory parameter is according to the following requirements:
null, or Value of parameter l The parameter values do not exceed
is wrong the ranges of the parameters specified
by the command.
l The entered parameter names are
correct.
l The parameters are entered in the
correct order.

2686058499 Unknown command Check whether the command word is


correct. If it is incorrect, change it to
MOD-DEVIP and reissue it.

2686058801 The device does not exist The device does not exist. In this case,
ensure that the device IP address is
correct.

Example
To change the device IP address 10.71.62.30 to 10.71.62.31, run the following command:

MOD-DEVIP::DEVIP=10.71.62.30:121::NEWDEVIP=10.71.62.31;

The result is as follows:


7340034 2005-06-08 16:39:39
M 121 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
;

Related Command
LST-DEV

13.2.29 Adding an Alarm to the U2000 (ADD-ALARM)

Usage Note
The alarm to be added to the U2000 must exist on the device.

Command Format
ADD-ALARM::(DID=Device-ID|DEV=Device-name|DEVIP=device-IP)(,NODETYPE=lNodeType)
[,CLASS=cFaultClass][,LEVEL=cFaultLevel][,FUNCTION=cFaultFunction]
(,FAULTID=sFaultID)[,REASONID=sReasonID][,PARA=strPara][,DETAIL=strDetail]
(,FLAG=cFaultFlag):CTAG::;

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 161


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Supporting Device
For information about the supporting devices, see Table 24-1.

Input Parameter
Paramete Type Range Description Default
r

DID INTEGER - (Optional) Indicates the device ID. -

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) (Optional) Indicates the device -


STRING name by default. If the value of
the configuration item
DEVMEAN is 1, the DEV
parameter indicates the IP address
of the device. For details about
how to modify configuration
items, see 23.7 How to Locate a
Device According to the IP
Address.

DEVIP IPADDRE - (Optional) Indicates the IP address -


SS of the device.

NODETY INTEGER 1 Indicates the node type. The -


PE 255 meanings of the options are as
follows:
l 1: device alarm
l 255: U2000 alarm

CLASS INTEGER 1-6 Indicates the classification of the -


alarm or event on the U2000. The
meanings of the options are as
follows:
1: communication
2: environment
3: device
4: service
5: processing
6: security

LEVEL INTEGER 1-4 Indicates the alarm severity or -


event level. The meanings of the
options are as follows:
1: critical
2: major
3: minor
4: warning

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 162


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Paramete Type Range Description Default


r

FUNCTIO INTEGER 1-10 Indicates the functional -


N classification. The meanings of
the options are as follows:
1: power alarm
2: environment alarm
3: signaling alarm
4: trunk alarm
5: hardware alarm
6: software alarm
7: operation alarm
8: communication failure
9: service quality
10: processing error

FAULTID INTEGER 0-999999999 Indicates the alarm or event ID. -


This parameter and the device
type are used to identify an alarm
or event.

REASONI INTEGER 0-999999999 Indicates the cause ID of the -


D alarm.

PARA OCTET SIZE (255) (Optional) Indicates the location -


STRING parameters of the alarm or event.
The format is "subrack ID/slot ID/
subslot ID/port ID/ONU ID/ONU
slot ID/ONU port ID" (if the
subslot does not exist, enter 65535
as the subslot ID).

DETAIL OCTET SIZE (255) Indicates the details of the alarm -


STRING or event and explanation of other
non-location parameters. For
example, MAC#0404-OOAE-
OOAB and ONUIP#10.10.10.10,
where the symbol # means "be
equal to". Multiple non-location
parameters are separated by a
space.

FLAG INTEGER 0-2 Indicates the flag field. The -


meanings of the options are as
follows:
0: event alarm
1: fault alarm
2: recovery alarm

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 163


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

NOTE

l You must set one of the DID, DEV, and DEVIP parameters. The NODETYPE and FAULTID
parameters are mandatory, and other parameters are optional.
l If the PARA parameter is set, the value must be in the format "subrack ID/slot ID/subslot ID/port
ID/ONU ID/ONU slot ID/ONU port ID". You can enter only part of the information. For example, if
you enter only 0/1, it indicates slot 1 in shelf 0. If the location information contains the port ID, you
must enter the subslot ID at first. If the subslot does not exist, enter 65535 as the subslot ID. For
example, if you enter 0/1/65535/1, it indicates port 0/1/1.

Response Format
The alarm is displayed as an alarm, an event, or a cleared alarm on the U2000.

Output Parameter
None.

Error Code
None.

Example
To add event 120 to the U2000, run the following command:

ADD-ALARM::DEV=MA5680T,NODETYPE=255,FAULTID=120,FLAG=1:CTAG::;

The result is as follows:


0 2008-12-18 14:21:09
M CTAG COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
;

Related Command
None.

13.2.30 Saving the Device Configuration (SAVE-DEV)

Usage Note
This command is used to save the configuration of the device on the U2000.

Command Format
SAVE-DEV::DEV=Device-name|DID=Device-ID|DEVIP=device-IP:CTAG::[TYPE=DATA|CFG];

Supporting Device
For information about the supporting devices, see Table 24-1.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 164


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Input Parameter
Param Type Range Description Default
eter

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the device name -


STRING by default. If the value of
the configuration item
DEVMEAN is 1, the
DEV parameter indicates
the IP address of the
device. For details about
how to modify
configuration items, see
23.7 How to Locate a
Device According to the
IP Address.

DID Integer - Indicates the device ID. -

DEVIP IPADDRES - Indicates the IP address -


S of the device.

TYPE OCTET l DATA Save type -


STRING l CFG l DATA: Only save data
file.
l CFG: Only save
configuration file.
l Not input TYPE
parameter: Save data
file and configuration
file.

NOTE
Each one of the preceding three parameters can uniquely identify a device. Therefore, you need to set
only one parameter when saving the device configuration.

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the operation command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.

Output Parameter
None.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 165


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Error Code
ID Description Solution

1610612769 Wrong SNMP parameter(s) The access to the device


or reading database failed fails because the device is
offline or abnormal.

2689017157 System is busy, please try it The operation fails because


later the device is busy. In this
case, try to perform the
operation later.

2686058531 The device does not exist The access to the device
fails because the device does
not exist.

2686058508 Task timeout The task times out because


the process is busy. In this
case, try to perform the
operation later.

Example
To save the configuration of the device named 10.71.211.15, run the following command:

SAVE-DEV::DEV=10.71.211.15:6::;

The result is as follows:


7340225 2009-08-11 11:53:30
M 6 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
;

Related Command
None.

13.2.31 Issuing the Command Configuration Script to a Device


(CFG-DEVEX)

Usage Note
NOTE

To prevent sensitive data from being leaked, the configuration script should not contain security-related
information such as service passwords and phone numbers.
l The DEV (IP address of an OLT) and ONULOCATEINFO parameters can be used as
the location information. Before using these two parameters as the location information,
make sure that the DEV parameter indicates the IP address of the device. For details, see
23.7 How to Locate a Device According to the IP Address.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 166


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

l If MODE is TELNET and the USER and PASSWORD parameters are not specified,
configure Telnet and STelnet parameters on the U2000 and the device before running this
command. Perform the following operations to configure the parameters on the U2000:
NOTE

The STelnet service is securer than the Telent service. Therefore, the STelnet service is recommended.

a. Choose Administration > NE Communicate Parameter > Set NE Telnet/STelnet


Parameter (traditional style) from the main menu or select Fix-Network NE
Configuration in Application Center and choose Administration > NE
Communicate Parameter > Set NE Telnet/STelnet Parameter (application style)
from the main menu.

b. Select a desired device from the navigation tree on the left, and click .
c. In the dialog box on the right, configure Telnet or STelnet parameters.
n The Protocol Name, Port No., Auth. Mode, User Name, Password, and
Private Key configured on the U2000 must be consistent with those on the
device.
n The default value of Port No. is 23 and the default value is recommended
when you configure Telnet parameters. Auth. Mode needs to be set to User
Auth.

Figure 13-1 Configuring STelnet parameters

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 167


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Figure 13-2 Configuring Telnet parameters

d. (Optional) When Protocol Name is set to STelnet and OPERATION_MODE


needs to be verified, verify the device fingerprint. For details about how to set
OPERATION_MODE, see Table 9-1.
i. Choose Administration > NE Communicate Parameter > Set NE SSH
Fingerprint (traditional style) from the main menu or select Fix-Network NE
Configuration in Application Center and choose Administration > NE
Communicate Parameter > Set NE SSH Fingerprint (application style)
from the main menu.

ii. Select the desired device in the navigation tree and click .
iii. In the dialog box that is displayed, modify and verify the device fingerprint.
l This command can be run to execute the command configuration script (.cfg file) in
Telnet/STelnet or file loading mode. Then all commands in the command configuration
script are issued to the device.
l The configuration principles of the command configuration script are as follows:
With a command configuration script and the TL1 command CFG-DEVEX, you can
quickly set parameters for similar services. The file format of the script, usually in
the .cfg format, is associated with the value of MODE in the TL1 command.
– If the value of MODE is CFGFILE, conform to the following rules:
n Contents in the script are the same as contents in the configuration file backed
up on the device by running the backup configuration xxx command.
n The script loaded to the device takes effect only after the device is restarted.
The effect is the same as the operation of loading a configuration file on the
device by running the load configuration xxx command.
n The script can contain character strings such as @para1@ and @para2@ that
represent user-defined settings. Before the command configuration script is
applied to the device, these character strings are replaced by the value of
PARAS in the TL1 command. The script can contain character strings such as
@para1@ and @para2@ that represent user-defined settings. Before the

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 168


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

command configuration script is applied to the device, these character strings


are replaced by the value of PARAS in the TL1 command.
n You can configure service data on a device and back up the configuration file.
The backup becomes a script template after you change user-defined settings
in it to character strings such as @para1@ and @para2@.
– If the value of MODE is SCRIPTFILE, conform to the following rules:
n Each command in the script is a complete command that can be successfully
run in an appropriate mode.
n The script does not contain any interactive commands. If a command passes
verification on the device, it should be submitted to the application module and
the application module starts to process settings without requiring any other
user input.
n The script does not contain any system resetting commands or any commands
irrelevant to configuration, such as save, load, and backup.
n Each command in the script is valid. If an invalid command is run
unsuccessfully, subsequent commands can be run as usual.
n The script can contain rows consisting of #, <xxx>, or [xxx] only. The # and
[xxx] rows will be ignored. In <xxx>, if xxx is a number, it is regarded as a
delay. Otherwise, it is also ignored. If a command is longer than 255 bytes, it
will not be run. Instead, it will be written to the buffer of error with the reason
provided.
n The script can contain character strings such as @para1@ and @para2@ that
represent user-defined settings. Before the command configuration script is
applied to the device, these character strings are replaced by the value of
PARAS in the TL1 command. Multiple parameters in the configuration file
can be replaced and the parameters are separated with symbol #. Each
parameter consists of a maximum of 64 characters. For example, if PARAS is
set to 10#20, @para1@ and @para2@ in the command configuration script
will be replaced with 10 and 20 respectively. If one parameter needs to be set
to a series of values like A, A+1, A+2, and so on, use @para1@, (@para1@
+1), (@para1@+2), and so on in the command configuration script and set
PARAS to A.
The following is an example:
board add 0/20 h801PRTA
alarm output alarmid 0x12345678
vlan @para1@-@para2@
vlan @para3@
<2>
sysname Huawei
...

After you run this TL1 command wherein PARAS is set to 10#20#100, the
following settings are applied to the device:
board add 0/20 h801PRTA
alarm output alarmid 0x12345678
vlan 10-20
vlan 100
<2>
sysname Huawei
...

– If the value of MODE is TELNET, conform to the following rules:


n Commands in the command configuration script are the same as those you
enter in the device CLI after logging in to the device in Telnet/STelnet mode.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 169


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

n The script can contain character strings such as @para1@ and @para2@ that
represent user-defined settings. Before the command configuration script is
applied to the device, these character strings are replaced by the value of
PARAS in the TL1 command. The script can contain character strings such as
@para1@ and @para2@ that represent user-defined settings. Before the
command configuration script is applied to the device, these character strings
are replaced by the value of PARAS in the TL1 command.
The following is an example:
enable

config

board add 0/20 h801PRTA

alarm output alarmid 0x12345678

vlan @para1@-@para2@

vlan @para3@

sysname Huawei
...

After you run this TL1 command wherein PARAS is set to 10#20#100, the
following settings are applied to the device:
enable

config

board add 0/20 h801PRTA

alarm output alarmid 0x12345678

vlan 10-20

vlan 100

sysname Huawei
...

The device supports a fuzzy match with configuration script files based on the version in
the file name. The version number contains eight characters, for example, VxxxRxxx. If
there are multiple versions of configuration script files, the device automatically matches
the file whose version is the same as the real version of the device. If no such file exists,
the device matches the file of an earlier version. For example, there are three files,
test.cfg, test-V800R311.cfg, and test-V800R313.cfg. If the device version is earlier than
V800R311, the device matches the test.cfg file; if the device version is V800R312, the
device matches the test-V800R311.cfg file; if the device version is V800R313, the
device matches the test-V800R313.cfg file.
l The method for adding command line-based scripts is as follows:
a. Choose Configuration > FTTx Service Pre-Deployment > Configuration Script
Management (traditional style) from the main menu or select Fix-Network NE
Configuration in Application Center and choose Access Service > FTTx Service
Pre-Deployment > Configuration Script Management (application style) from
the main menu.
b. In the information list, right-click and choose Add from the shortcut menu.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 170


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

c. In the Add Configuration Script dialog box, enter a script name, set Execute
mode to TL1, and click Add. In the Select Configuration Script dialog box, select
the desired command line script profile and click OK.

Command Format
CFG-DEVEX::(DID=Device-id|DEV=Device-name|(DEV=device-olt-
ipaddress,ONULOCATEINFO=onu-locateinfomation)):CTAG::(PROFID=file-name)
[,MODE=execute-mode][,USER=User_Name,PASSWORD=User_Pwd]([,PARAS=value1#value2]|
[,PARAS1NAME=value1[,PARAS2NAME=value2[,PARAS3NAME=value3[,...]]]]);

Supporting Device
For information about the supporting devices, see Table 24-1.

Input Parameter
Paramete Type Range Description Default
r

DID INTEGE - Indicates the device ID. N/A


R

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the device name by N/A


STRING default. If the value of the
configuration item
DEVMEAN is 1, the DEV
parameter indicates the IP
address of the device. For
details about how to modify
configuration items, see 23.7
How to Locate a Device
According to the IP Address.
If you set both the DEV and
ONULOCATEINFO
parameters for an ONU, that is,
enter DEV=device-olt-
ipaddress,ONULOCATEINF
O=onu-locate-infomation, the
DEV parameter indicates the IP
address of the OLT.

ONULOC OCTET SIZE (128) Indicates the ONU location N/A


ATEINFO STRING information. This parameter is
used with the DEV parameter
(IP address of the OLT).
The format is subrack number/
slot ID/port ID/ONU ID. For
example, 0/2/0/0 indicates the
ONU 0 that is connected to port
0/2/0.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 171


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Paramete Type Range Description Default


r

PROFID OCTET SIZE (32) Indicates the name of the N/A


STRING command configuration script
to be issued.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 172


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Paramete Type Range Description Default


r

MODE OCTET CFGFILE Indicates the execution mode of N/A


STRING SCRIPTFILE the command configuration
script.
TELNET
The options are as follows:
l CFGFILE: Indicates the
FTP-based/SFTP-based
command configuration
script loading mode. In this
mode, the loaded command
configuration script replaces
the original command
configuration script of the
device. The configuration
takes effect only after you
restart the device.
l SCRIPTFILE: Indicates the
FTP-based/SFTP-based
command configuration
script loading mode. In this
mode, the command
configuration script is added
to the existing configuration
file of a device. The
configuration takes effect
immediately without the
restart of the device.
NOTE
ONUs of V800R307C01 and
later versions and OLTs of
V800R008C00 and later
versions support this mode.
l Telnet: Indicates the Telnet/
STelnet mode. In this mode,
you can telnet/STelnet to the
device to execute the
command configuration
script.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 173


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Paramete Type Range Description Default


r
NOTE
l SFTP is securer than FTP and
TFTP. Therefore, SFTP is
recommended.
l When the MODE=TELNET
parameter is specified:
l If the USER and
PASSWORD parameters
are specified, the U2000
logs in to the device using
the input user information
and issues configurations
via Telent service. Telent
service is not safe.
Therefore, this way is not
recommended.
l If the USER and
PASSWORD parameters
are not specified, you need
to set Telnet/STelnet
parameters on the
U2000. The U2000 logs in
to the device using the
configured parameters and
issues configurations. The
STelnet service is securer
than the Telent service.
Therefore, the STelnet
service is recommended.

USER OCTET SIZE (15) Indicates the user name for N/A
STRING logging in to the device.
NOTE
This parameter is supported only
when MODE is set to TELNET.

PASSWO OCTET SIZE (15) Indicates the password for N/A


RD STRING logging in to the device.
NOTE
This parameter is supported only
when MODE is set to TELNET.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 174


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Paramete Type Range Description Default


r

PARAS OCTET SIZE (129) Indicates the custom parameter N/A


STRING to be applied to a device. It can
replace the @para@ parameter
in the command configuration
scripts.
Multiple parameters in the
configuration file can be
replaced and the parameters are
separated with symbol #. Each
parameter consists of a
maximum of 64 characters. For
example, if PARAS is set to
10#20, @para1@ and
@para2@ in the command
configuration script will be
replaced with 10 and 20
respectively. If one parameter
needs to be set to a series of
values like A, A+1, A+2, and
so on, use @para1@,
(@para1@+1), (@para1@
+2), and so on in the command
configuration script and set
PARAS to A.

PARASN OCTET SIZE (512) Indicates the custom parameter N/A


NAME STRING to be applied to a device. It can
replace the @para@ parameter
in the PROFID configuration
file. This parameter is not fixed
but can be customized, for
example, VLAN or
SYANAME.
Multiple parameters in the
configuration file can be
replaced and the parameters are
separated with symbol #. Each
parameter consists of a
maximum of 512 characters. N
is an integer ranging from 1, for
example, 1, 2, 3...

NOTE
You must enter either the device ID or the device name.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 175


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the operation command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.

Output Parameter
None.

Error Code
ID Description Solution

1616445446 The configuration script file Upload the required


does not exist. configuration script file to
the \server\etc\oss_cfg
\access\hostcfg directory on
the server.

1616445448 Logging in to the device Verify that the user name


failed. and password for logging in
to the device are correct or
that the number of logins
through this user name does
not exceed the maximum
value.

1618280493 Telnet/STelnet parameters Check whether the


are not set for the NE command contains
MODE=TELNET but does
not contain the USER or
PASSWORD parameter.
If yes, set Telnet/STelnet
parameters on the U2000
and issue this command
again.

Example
Example 1: Assume that the user name and password for logging in to the device named
10.78.32.13 are root and mduadmin respectively. To issue the \server\etc\oss_cfg\access
\hostcfg\test.cfg file on the server to the device and replace @para1@ and @para2@ in the
file with 10.0.0.0 and 10.11.12.13 respectively, run the following command:
CFG-
DEVEX::DEV=10.78.32.13:1::PROFID=test.cfg,MODE=TELNET,USER=root,PASSW
ORD=mduadmin,PARAS=10.0.0.0#10.11.12.13;
The result is as follows:
7340034 2007-04-05 16:39:39
M 1 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
;

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 176


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Example 2: Assume that the user name and password for logging in to the device named
10.78.32.13 are root and mduadmin respectively. To issue the \server\etc\oss_cfg\access
\hostcfg\test.cfg file on the server to the device and replace @SYSNAME@ and @VLAN@
in the file with MA5600T and 100 respectively, run the following command:
CFG-
DEVEX::DEV=10.78.32.13:1::PROFID=test.cfg,MODE=TELNET,USER=root,PASSW
ORD=mduadmin,SYSNAME=MA5600T,VLAN=100;
The result is as follows:
7340034 2007-04-05 16:42:51
M 1 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
;

Related Command
None.

13.2.32 Issuing the Command Configuration Script to an MDE


Device (CFG-MDUEX)
Usage Note
NOTE

To prevent sensitive data from being leaked, the configuration script should not contain security-related
information such as service passwords and phone numbers.
l This command can be run to execute the command configuration script (.cfg file) in file
loading mode. Then all commands in the command configuration script are issued to the
device. In this mode, the command configuration script is added to the existing
configuration file of a device. The configuration takes effect immediately without the
restart of the device.
NOTE
EPON MDUs of V800R307C01 and later versions support this mode.
l The configuration principles of the command configuration script are as follows:
With a command configuration script and the TL1 command CFG-MDUEX, you can
quickly set parameters for similar services on devices of the same type and with the same
number of ports. The script is in the .cfg format and has the following rules:
– Naming rule
The naming rule is associated with the PROFID parameter in the TL1 command
CFG-MDUEX. The file name format is Device type-PROFID-Version.cfg for the
MA5612, MA5616, and MA5610 and Device type-Number of FE electrical ports-
PROFID-Version.cfg for other types of device, please set Number of FE electrical
ports to 0 if the device has no FE electrical ports.
n PROFID: For broadband services, PROFID must be HSI. For voice services,
PROFID must be VOICE. For other common configurations, PROFID must
be COMMON.
n Version: The version number contains eight characters, for example,
VxxxRxxx. If there are multiple versions of configuration script files, the
device automatically matches the file whose version is the same as the real
version of the device. If no such file exists, the device matches the file of an

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 177


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

earlier version. For example, there are three files, MA5616-COMMON.cfg,


MA5616-COMMON-V800R311.cfg, and MA5616-COMMON-
V800R313.cfg. If the device version is earlier than V800R311, the device
matches the MA5616-COMMON.cfg file; if the device version is V800R312,
the device matches the MA5616-COMMON-V800R311.cfg file; if the device
version is V800R313, the device matches the MA5616-COMMON-
V800R313.cfg file.
NOTE
The MA5612, MA5616, and MA5610 must have the NE type-PROFID.cfg file. Other types of
NEs must have the NE type-FE electrical port quantity-PROFID.cfg file, please set Number of
FE electrical ports to 0 if the device has no FE electrical ports.For example, if the device is the
MA5620 V800R313 with eight Ethernet ports and PROFID is COMMON, add a script for
importing the MA5620-8-COMMON.cfg file to the Configuration Script Management function.
– Configuration rule
A command configuration script is a collection of device commands and has the
following configuration rules:
n Each command in the script is a complete command that can be successfully
run in an appropriate mode.
n The script does not contain any interactive commands. If a command passes
verification on the device, it should be submitted to the application module and
the application module starts to process settings without requiring any other
user input.
n The script does not contain any system resetting commands or any commands
irrelevant to configuration, such as save, load, and backup.
n Each command in the script is valid. If an invalid command is run
unsuccessfully, subsequent commands can be run as usual.
n The script can contain rows consisting of #, <xxx>, or [xxx] only. The # and
[xxx] rows will be ignored. In <xxx>, if xxx is a number, it is regarded as a
delay. Otherwise, it is also ignored. If a command is longer than 255 bytes, it
will not be run. Instead, it will be written to the buffer of error with the reason
provided.
n The script can contain character strings such as @para1@ and @para2@ that
represent user-defined settings. Before the command configuration script is
applied to the device, these character strings are replaced by the value of
PARAS in the TL1 command. Multiple parameters in the configuration file
can be replaced and the parameters are separated with symbol #. Each
parameter consists of a maximum of 64 characters. For example, if PARAS is
set to 10#20, @para1@ and @para2@ in the command configuration script
will be replaced with 10 and 20 respectively. If one parameter needs to be set
to a series of values like A, A+1, A+2, and so on, use @para1@, (@para1@
+1), (@para1@+2), and so on in the command configuration script and set
PARAS to A.
The following is an example:
board add 0/20 h801PRTA
alarm output alarmid 0x12345678
vlan @para1@-@para2@
vlan @para3@
<2>
sysname Huawei
...

After you run this TL1 command wherein PARAS is set to 10#20#100, the
following settings are applied to the device:

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 178


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

board add 0/20 h801PRTA


alarm output alarmid 0x12345678
vlan 10-20
vlan 100
<2>
sysname Huawei
...

l The method for adding command line-based scripts is as follows:


a. Choose Configuration > FTTx Service Pre-Deployment > Configuration Script
Management (traditional style) from the main menu or select Fix-Network NE
Configuration in Application Center and choose Access Service > FTTx Service
Pre-Deployment > Configuration Script Management (application style) from
the main menu.
b. In the information list, right-click and choose Add from the shortcut menu.
c. In the Add Configuration Script dialog box, enter a script name, set Execute
mode to TL1, and click Add. In the Select Configuration Script dialog box, select
the desired command line script profile and click OK.
l If you enable the TL1 offline predeployment function, a scheduling task is generated in
the scheduling center when you run the CFG-MDUEX command, and TL1 commands
are added to this task as subitems. After MDUs are powered on, TL1 commands are
issued in sequence. If you do not enable the TL1 offline predeployment function, an
error message is displayed indicating that devices are offline when you run the CFG-
MDUEX command. For details about how to set the configuration item LoadOffline,
see Table 9-1.

Command Format
CFG-MDUEX::(DID=Device-ID|DEV=Device-name),(ONTKEY=ont-password):CTAG::
(PROFID=file-name)([,PARAS=value1#value2]|
[,PARAS1NAME=value1[,PARAS2NAME=value2[,PARAS3NAME=value3[,...]]]]);

Supporting Device
Device Type No. Device Type

70 MA5610

104 MA5612

100 MA5616

61 MA5626E

62 MA5620E

96 MA5620

97 MA5626

2333 MA5698

2335 MA5694

2336 MA5821

2337 MA5822

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 179


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Device Type No. Device Type

2338 MA5898

2339 MA5818

2339 MA5818

2343 MA5894S

Input Parameter
Param Type Range Description Defau
eter lt

DID INTEG - Indicates the OLT device ID. N/A


ER

DEV OCTE SIZE (192) Indicates the OLT device name by default. N/A
T If the value of the configuration item
STRIN DEVMEAN is 1, the DEV parameter
G indicates the IP address of the device. For
details about how to modify configuration
items, see 23.7 How to Locate a Device
According to the IP Address.

ONTK OCTE SIZE (32) Indicates the SN or password of a GPON N/A


EY T ONU or the key or MAC address of an
STRIN EPON ONU. You can locate an MDU
G according to the OLT device and the ONT
key.

PROFI OCTE SIZE (32) Indicates the name of the command N/A
D T configuration script to be issued.
STRIN NOTE
G l When this parameter is set to NULL, only a
scheduling task is generated and no
command configuration script is issued.
l PROFID: For broadband services, PROFID
must be HSI. For voice services, PROFID
must be VOICE. For other common
configurations, PROFID must be
COMMON.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 180


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Param Type Range Description Defau


eter lt

PARAS OCTE SIZE (129) Indicates the custom parameter to be N/A


T applied to a device. It can replace the
STRIN @para@ parameter in the command
G configuration scripts.
Multiple parameters in the configuration
file can be replaced and the parameters are
separated with symbol #. Each parameter
consists of a maximum of 64 characters.
For example, if PARAS is set to 10#20,
@para1@ and @para2@ in the command
configuration script will be replaced with
10 and 20 respectively. If one parameter
needs to be set to a series of values like A,
A+1, A+2, and so on, use @para1@,
(@para1@+1), (@para1@+2), and so on
in the command configuration script and set
PARAS to A.

PARAS OCTE SIZE (512) Indicates the custom parameter to be -


NNAM T applied to a device. It can replace the
E STRIN @para@ parameter in the PROFID
G configuration file. This parameter is not
fixed but can be customized, for example,
VLAN or SYANAME.
Multiple parameters in the configuration
file can be replaced and the parameters are
separated with symbol #. Each parameter
consists of a maximum of 512 characters. N
is an integer ranging from 1, for example, 1,
2, 3...

NOTE
You must enter either the device ID or the device name.

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the operation command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.

Output Parameter
None.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 181


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Error Code
ID Description Solution

1616445446 The configuration script file Upload the required


does not exist. configuration script file to
the \server\etc\oss_cfg
\access\hostcfg directory on
the server.

Example
Example 1: To issue the \server\etc\oss_cfg\access\hostcfg\MA5620-8-COMMON.cfg file
on the server to the device whose ONTKEY is ma5620e and replace @SYSNAME@ and
@VLAN@ in the file with MA5620 and 100 respectively, run the following command:
CFG-MDUEX::DEV=10.70.32.13,ONTKEY=ma5620e:
1::PROFID=COMMON,SYSNAME=MA5620,VLAN=100;
The result is as follows:
7340034 2007-04-05 16:39:39
M 1 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.

Example 2: To issue the \server\etc\oss_cfg\access\hostcfg\MA5620-8-COMMON.cfg file


on the server to the device whose ONTKEY is ma5620e and replace @para1@ and
(@para1@+1) in the file with 6 and 7 respectively, run the following command:
CFG-MDUEX::DEV=10.70.32.13,ONTKEY=ma5620e:
1::PROFID=COMMON,PARAS=6;
The result is as follows:
7340034 2007-04-05 16:39:39
M 1 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.

Related Command
None.

13.2.33 Configuring the ANCP (CFG-PORTANCPINTERFACE)


Usage Note
This command is used to distribute ADSL, VDSL2, G.SHDSLto different ANCP domains
that are managed by different broadband network gateways (BNGs). Ensure that the ANCP
domain is enabled before running this command.
The command cannot be used to configure Access Node Control Protocol (ANCP) for ONTs.

Command Format
CFG-PORTANCPINTERFACE::(DID=Device-ID|DEV=Device-name),FN=frame-num,SN=slot-
num,PN=port-num:CTAG::PARTITIONID=Partition-

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 182


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

ID,ENABLESWITCH=Switch,INTERFACETYPE=InterFace-TYPE[,(VPI=PVC-VPI,VCI=PVC-VCI)|
(VLANID=Vlan-ID)];

Supporting Device
Device Type No. Device Type

34 MA5680T

92 MA5652G

94 MA5603U

95 MA5603T

100 MA5616

2331 MA5608T

249 MA5600T

2348 MA5683T

Input Parameter
Parameter Type Range Description Default

DID INTEGER - Indicates the device ID. -

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the device -


STRING name by default. If the
value of the
configuration item
DEVMEAN is 1, the
DEV parameter indicates
the IP address of the
device. For details about
how to modify
configuration items, see
23.7 How to Locate a
Device According to the
IP Address.

FN INTEGER 0-255 Indicates the subrack ID. -

SN INTEGER 0-35 Indicates the slot ID. -

PN INTEGER 0-63 Indicates the port ID. -

PARTITIO INTEGER 1-255 Indicates the ID of the -


NID ANCP domain.

ENABLES OCTET l ENABLE Enables or disables the -


WITCH STRING l DISABLE ANCP function of the
ports.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 183


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Parameter Type Range Description Default

INTERFA OCTET l ETH Indicates the type of the -


CETYPE STRING l ATM packets during the ANCP
session.

VPI INTEGER 0-4095 Indicates the VPI of the -


ANCP.
NOTE
This parameter can be set
only when
INTERFACETYPE is set
to ATM.

VCI INTEGER 32-65535 Indicates the VCI of the -


ANCP. It is used to
identify a virtual channel
in a virtual path.
NOTE
This parameter can be set
only when
INTERFACETYPE is set
to ATM.

VLANID INTEGER 1-4095 Indicates the ID of the -


user VLAN.
NOTE
This parameter can be set
only when
INTERFACETYPE is set
to ETH.

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the operation command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.

Output Parameter
None.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 184


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Error Code
ID Description Solution

2686058498 Missing, invalid parameter or Ensure that the command is correct


mandatory parameter is null, or according to the following
Value of parameter is wrong. requirements:
l The parameter values do not
exceed the ranges of the
parameters specified by the
command.
l The entered parameter names are
correct.
l The parameters are entered in the
correct order.

Example
To configure the ANCP of port 0/13/3 on the MA5600T named 10.144.194.11, run the
following command:
CFG-
PORTANCPINTERFACE::DEV=10.144.194.11,FN=0,SN=13,PN=3:CTAG::PARTITIO
NID=1,ENABLESWITCH=ENABLE,INTERFACETYPE=ATM,VPI=1,VCI=32;
The result is as follows:
7340049 2012-05-04 10:55:05
M CTAG COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
;

Related Command
There is no related command.

13.2.34 Modifying System Attributes for NEs (CFG-


DEVSYSPARA)
Usage Note
Currently, the MAC duplicate function of NEs can be modified.

Command Format
CFG-DEVSYSPARA::(DID=Device-ID|DEV=Device-name):CTAG::(MACDUPLICATE=mac-
duplicate);

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 185


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Supporting Device
Device Type No. Device Type

249 MA5600T

95 MA5603T

2331 MA5608T

34 MA5680T

2346/2349/2352/2353 MA5800-X17/MA5800-X7/MA5800-X15/
MA5800-X2

Input Parameter
Para Type Range Description Default
met
er

DID INTEG 7340032-8 Indicates the device ID. N/A


ER 253439

DEV OCTET SIZE Indicates the device name by default. If the N/A
STRIN (192) value of the configuration item
G DEVMEAN is 1, the DEV parameter
indicates the IP address of the device. For
details about how to modify configuration
items, see 23.7 How to Locate a Device
According to the IP Address.

MA OCTET ENABLE Indicates the MAC duplicate function. N/A


CDU STRIN DISABLE Before the source MAC address of a port is
PLIC G aged, the access node learns the source
ATE MAC address of the port from another port
and then updates the mapping between the
source MAC address and the port in the
MAC address table. This process is called
MAC address duplicate (also known as
MAC address flapping), because it can be
regarded as if the access node copied the
MAC address from one port to another port
(the MAC address flaps from one port to
another port). Setting ACDUPLICATE to
DISABLE can prevent the MAC addresses
of authorized users or upper-layer devices
from being duplicated by malicious users.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 186


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System 13 Controlling a Session and Performing Operations on a
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide Device

Response Format
This response format complies with that of the operation command provided in 11.3
Response Format Description.

Output Parameter
None.

Error Code
ID Description Solution

2686058531 The device does not exist. Verify that the entered parameters for
locating the device are correct.

2686058498 Missing, invalid parameter Ensure that the command is correct


or mandatory parameter is according to the following requirements:
null, or Value of parameter l The parameter values do not exceed the
is wrong ranges of the parameters specified by
the command.
l The entered parameter names are
correct.
l The parameters are entered in the
correct order.

Example
To modify the system attributes of the NE named 10.144.252.32, run the following command:
CFG-DEVSYSPARA::DEV=10.144.252.32:CTAG::MACDUPLICATE=ENABLE;
The result is as follows:
7340038 2014-07-20 17:07:05
M CTAG COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
;

Related Command
There is no related command.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 187


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 14 Notification of Resource Changes

14 Notification of Resource Changes

About This Chapter

This topic provides the commands for registering, canceling, and querying the notification of
resource changes. Device resource management includes the notification of adding or deleting
a device, shelf, or board.

14.1 Notifying Resource Changes


This topic provides commands and examples for registering, canceling, and querying resource
change notifications.
14.2 Notifying Device Resource Changes
This topic provides the notifications and examples of device resource changes, including the
addition and deletion of devices, shelves, and slots.
14.3 Notifying GPON Resource Changes
This topic provides the notifications and examples of GPON resource changes, including the
event that an FTTH GPON ONU port is online, automatic ONU discovery, and ONU
replacement.
14.4 Notifying EPON Resource Changes
This topic provides the notifications and examples of EPON resource changes, including the
event that an FTTH ONU port is online, automatic ONU discovery, and ONU replacement.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 188


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 14 Notification of Resource Changes

14.1 Notifying Resource Changes


This topic provides commands and examples for registering, canceling, and querying resource
change notifications.

14.1.1 Registering the Notification of Resource Changes (REG-


RESCHGNOTIFY)
Usage Note
After this command is issued, the OSS/NMS receives the notification of resource changes
when the resources such as the device, shelf, and slot change.

Command Format
REG-RESCHGNOTIFY:::CTAG::;

Supporting Device
This command has nothing to do with the type of device.

Input Parameter
None.

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the operation command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.

Output Parameter
None.

Error Code
None.

Example
To register the notification of resource changes for the current user, run the following
command:
REG-RESCHGNOTIFY:::1::;
The result is as follows:

0 2005-06-09 16:07:19
M 1 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 189


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 14 Notification of Resource Changes

Related Command
None.

14.1.2 Canceling the Notification of Resource Changes (UREG-


RESCHGNOTIFY)
Usage Note
None.

Command Format
UREG-RESCHGNOTIFY:::CTAG::;

Supporting Device
This command has nothing to do with the type of device.

Input Parameter
None.

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the operation command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.

Output Parameter
None.

Error Code
None.

Example
To cancel the notification of resource changes for the current user, run the following
command:
UREG-RESCHGNOTIFY:::2::;
The result is as follows:

0 2005-06-09 16:07:19
M 2 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 190


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 14 Notification of Resource Changes

Related Command
None.

14.1.3 Querying the Notification of Resource Changes (LST-


BMSRESCHANOTIFY)
Usage Note
None.

Command Format
LST-BMSRESCHANOTIFY:::CTAG::STARTAID=initial AID[,ENDAID=last AID];

Supporting Device
This command has nothing to do with the type of device.

Input Parameter
Parameter Type Range Description Default

STARTAID INTEGER 0-2147483647 Indicates the start -


access identifier
(AID). It is used to
query the
notifications whose
sequence number is
greater than or equal
to the start AID.

ENDAID INTEGER 0-2147483647 (Optional) Indicates -


the end AID. It is
used to query the
notifications whose
sequence number is
smaller than or equal
to the end AID.

Response Format
It complies with the response format of the query command provided in 11.3 Response
Format Description.
title="Changed resource notice whose ID from" + STARTAID + " to " + ENDAID
name of attributes: AID mark DID DEV FN SN

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 191


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 14 Notification of Resource Changes

Output Parameter
Descr Type Range Description
iption

AID INTEGE 0-2147483647 Indicates the sequence number of the


R notification of resource changes.

mark OCTET l DEVAFFIRM Indicates the resource change. The


STRING l FRAMEAFFIRM meanings of the options are as
follows:
l SLOTAFFIRM
l DEVAFFIRM: A device is
l DEVDEL confirmed.
l FRAMEDEL l FRAMEAFFIRM: A shelf is
l SLOTDEL confirmed.
l SLOTAFFIRM: A slot is
confirmed.
l DEVDEL: A device is deleted.
l FRAMEDEL: A shelf is deleted.
l SLOTDEL: A slot is deleted.

DID INTEGE - Indicates the device ID.


R

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the device name by default.


STRING If the value of the configuration item
DEVMEAN is 1, the DEV
parameter indicates the IP address of
the device. For details about how to
modify configuration items, see 23.7
How to Locate a Device According
to the IP Address.

FN INTEGE 0-255 Indicates the subrack ID.


R

SN INTEGE 0-35 Indicates the slot ID.


R

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 192


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 14 Notification of Resource Changes

Error Code
ID Description Solution

2686058552 The resource does not exist. Ensure that the ID of the
notification of resource
changes exists in the
database.
Run the LST-
BMSRESCHANOTIFY:::
2::STARTAID=0;
command to obtain the
maximum ID of the
notification of resource
changes and ensure that the
entered ID is not greater
than the maximum ID.

Example
To query the notifications sequence serial numbers that are greater than or equal to 1, run the
following command:
LST-BMSRESCHANOTIFY:::2::STARTAID=1;
The result is as follows:

0 2005-06-09 16:30:53
M 2 COMPLD
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
blktag=1
blkcount=5
blktotal=5

Changed resource notice whose ID from 1


--------------------------------
AID mark DID DEV FN SN
1 SLOTDEL 7344129 10.71.56.151 0 5
2 SLOTDEL 7344129 10.71.56.151 0 6
3 SLOTDEL 7344129 10.71.56.151 0 1
4 DEVAFFIRM 7344129 10.71.56.151 -- --
5 SLOTAFFIRM 7344129 10.71.56.151 0 1
--------------------------------

Related Command
None.

14.2 Notifying Device Resource Changes


This topic provides the notifications and examples of device resource changes, including the
addition and deletion of devices, shelves, and slots.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 193


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 14 Notification of Resource Changes

14.2.1 Notifying Device Confirmation


Usage Note
The resource change notification must be registered for the current user through the REG-
RESCHGNOTIFY command.

Response Format
It complies with the response format provided in 11.4 Format Description of the Resource
Change Notification.
<header>< auto id ><text block><terminator>
header::=<cr><lf><lf>^^^<DID>^<year>-<month>-<day>^<hour>:<minute>:<second>
<auto id>::=<cr><lf> A^^<atag>^<DEVAFFIRM>
text block::=((<cr><lf>^^^<EN=error-code>) | (<cr><lf>^^^<quoted line>))
quotedline::=^^^<blktag=block-tag><cr><lf>^^^<blkcount=currentblock-
count><cr><lf>^^^<blktotal=total-count><cr><lf><result>
result::=<cr><lf><title><cr><lf>(<->*)<cr><lf>(<attribs>((<values>)*))(<-
>*)<cr><lf><cr><lf>
attribs::=<attrib>((^^<attrib>)*)<cr><lf>
values::=<value>((^^<value>)*)<cr><lf>
terminator::= <cr><lf>(;|>)
title="Information of added device"
name of attributes: DID DEV FN SN

Output Parameter
Parameter Type Range Description

DID INTEGER - Indicates the device ID.

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the device name by default.


STRING When the value of configuration item
BMSNB_MSGNOTIFY_DEVMEAN
is 1, the DEV parameter indicates the
IP address of the device.

FN INTEGER 0-255 Indicates the subrack ID. It is invalid


and is set to - to maintain the unified
format.

SN INTEGER 0-35 Indicates the slot ID. It is invalid and is


set to - to maintain the unified format.

Error Code
None.

Example
If the reporting of TL1 NBI alarms is enabled (that is, the REG-RESCHGNOTIFY:::1::;
command is executed), the OSS system receives a resource change notification when the
device with ID 7667723 is added successfully.
7667723 2005-05-23 13:01:09
A 1537 DEVAFFIRM

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 194


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 14 Notification of Resource Changes

EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
blktag=1
blkcount=1
blktotal=1
Information of added device
---------------------
DID DEV FN SN
7667723 UA5000(PVM)_10.71.56.139 -- --
---------------------
;

Related Command
REG-RESCHGNOTIFY

14.2.2 Notifying Device Deletion

Usage Note
The resource change notification must be registered for the current user through the REG-
RESCHGNOTIFY command.

Command Format
None. After an OLT is deleted, the U2000 reports a change notification to the OSS.

Supporting Device
Device Type No. Device Type

34 MA5680T

57 MA5606T

94 MA5603U

95 MA5603T

249 MA5600T

2331 MA5608T

2348 MA5683T

2346/2349/2352/2353 MA5800-X17/MA5800-X7/MA5800-X15/MA5800-X2

Input Parameter
None.

Response Format
It complies with the response format provided in 11.4 Format Description of the Resource
Change Notification.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 195


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 14 Notification of Resource Changes

Output Parameter
Paramete Type Range Description
r

DID INTEGER - Indicates the device ID.

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the device name by


STRING default. When the value of
configuration item
BMSNB_MSGNOTIFY_DEVME
AN is 1, the DEV parameter
indicates the IP address of the
device.

FN INTEGER 0-255 Indicates the subrack ID.

SN INTEGER 0-35 Indicates the slot ID.

Error Code
None.

Example
If the reporting of TL1 NBI alarms is enabled (that is, the REG-RESCHGNOTIFY:::1::;
command is executed), the OSS system receives a resource change notification when the
device with ID 7356419 is deleted successfully.
7356419 2005-05-23 12:51:01
A 1535 DEVDEL
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
blktag=1
blkcount=1
blktotal=1
Information of deleted device
---------------------
DID DEV FN SN
7356419 10.71.56.139 -- --
---------------------
;

Related Command
REG-RESCHGNOTIFY

14.2.3 Notifying Device Synchronization


Usage Note
The resource change notification must be registered for the current user through the REG-
RESCHGNOTIFY command.
By default, the NE synchronization results are not reported to the OSS. If the synchronization
results need to be reported, modify the SYNC_COMPLETED_NOTIFY_OSS configuration
item of the Table 9-1.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 196


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 14 Notification of Resource Changes

Response Format
It complies with the response format provided in 11.4 Format Description of the Resource
Change Notification.
<header>< auto id ><text block><terminator>
header::=<cr><lf><lf>^^^<DID>^<year>-<month>-<day>^<hour>:<minute>:<second>
<auto id>::=<cr><lf> A^^<atag>^<DEVAFFIRM>
text block::=((<cr><lf>^^^<EN=error-code>) | (<cr><lf>^^^<quoted line>))
quotedline::=^^^<blktag=block-tag><cr><lf>^^^<blkcount=currentblock-
count><cr><lf>^^^<blktotal=total-count><cr><lf><result>
result::=<cr><lf><title><cr><lf>(<->*)<cr><lf>(<attribs>((<values>)*))(<-
>*)<cr><lf><cr><lf>
attribs::=<attrib>((^^<attrib>)*)<cr><lf>
values::=<value>((^^<value>)*)<cr><lf>
terminator::= <cr><lf>(;|>)
title="Information of data synchronization."
name of attributes: DID DEV SRV RESULT REASON

Output Parameter
Parameter Type Range Description

DID INTEGER - Indicates the device ID.

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the device name by default.


STRING When the value of configuration item
BMSNB_MSGNOTIFY_DEVMEAN
is 1, the DEV parameter indicates the
IP address of the device.

SRV OCTET SIZE (128) Indicates the synchronized service


STRING module.

RESULT OCTET SIZE (128) Indicates the synchronization results.


STRING

REASON OCTET SIZE (128) Indicates the reason of the


STRING synchronization failure. If the
synchronization succeeds, this
parameter is displayed as "--".

Error Code
None.

Example
After running the REG-RESCHGNOTIFY:::1::; command to enable the NBI alarming
function, change value of the SYNC_COMPLETED_NOTIFY_OSS configuration item to
1. After the NE named 10.144.194.164 is synchronized successfully, the OSS receives
resource change notifications.
4294967295 2013-05-28 17:20:17
A 27 SYNCRESULT
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
blktag=1
blkcount=10

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 197


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 14 Notification of Resource Changes

blktotal=10

Information of data synchronization.


----------------------------------
DID DEV SRV RESULT REASON
7340032 10.144.194.164 ADSL Synchronization succeeded. --
7340032 10.144.194.164 EPON Synchronization succeeded. --
7340032 10.144.194.164 ETH Synchronization succeeded. --
7340032 10.144.194.164 GPON Synchronization succeeded. --
7340032 10.144.194.164 IGMP Synchronization succeeded. --
7340032 10.144.194.164 PHYRES Synchronization succeeded. --
7340032 10.144.194.164 PROTOCOL Synchronization succeeded. --
7340032 10.144.194.164 SERVICEPORT Synchronization succeeded. --
7340032 10.144.194.164 VDSL Synchronization succeeded. --
7340032 10.144.194.164 VOIP Synchronization succeeded. --
----------------------------------

Related Command
REG-RESCHGNOTIFY

14.2.4 Notifying Shelf Confirmation

Usage Note
The resource change notification must be registered for the current user through the REG-
RESCHGNOTIFY command.

Supporting Device
For information about the supporting devices, see Table 24-1.

Response Format
It complies with the response format provided in 11.4 Format Description of the Resource
Change Notification.
title="Information of added frame "
name of attributes: DID DEV FN SN

Output Parameter
Paramete Type Range Description
r

DID INTEGER - Indicates the device ID.

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the device name by default.


STRING When the value of configuration item
BMSNB_MSGNOTIFY_DEVMEA
N is 1, the DEV parameter indicates
the IP address of the device.

FN INTEGER 0-255 Indicates the subrack ID.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 198


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 14 Notification of Resource Changes

Paramete Type Range Description


r

SN INTEGER 0-35 Indicates the slot ID. It is invalid and


is set to - to maintain the unified
format.

Error Code
None.

Example
If the reporting of TL1 NBI alarms is enabled (that is, the REG-RESCHGNOTIFY:::1::;
command is executed), the OSS system receives a resource change notification when the shelf
with ID 1 is added successfully.
7667714 2005-06-07 15:17:29
A 3937 FRAMEAFFIRM
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
blktag=1
blkcount=1
blktotal=1
Information of added frame
---------------------
DID DEV FN SN
7667714 AMG_10.71.60.22 1 --
---------------------
;

Related Command
REG-RESCHGNOTIFY

14.2.5 Notifying the Shelf Deletion

Usage Note
The resource change notification must be registered for the current user through the REG-
RESCHGNOTIFY command.

Supporting Device
For information about the supporting devices, see Table 24-1.

Response Format
It complies with the response format provided in 11.4 Format Description of the Resource
Change Notification.

title="Information of deleted frame "


name of attributes: DID DEV FN SN

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 199


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 14 Notification of Resource Changes

Output Parameter
Parameter Type Range Description

DID INTEGER - Indicates the device ID.

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the device name by


STRING default. When the value of
configuration item
BMSNB_MSGNOTIFY_DEVM
EAN is 1, the DEV parameter
indicates the IP address of the
device.

FN INTEGER 0-255 Indicates the subrack ID.

SN INTEGER 0-35 Indicates the slot ID. It is invalid


and is set to - to maintain the
unified format.

Error Code
None.

Example
If the reporting of TL1 NBI alarms is enabled (that is, the REG-RESCHGNOTIFY:::1::;
command is executed), the OSS system receives a resource change notification when the shelf
with ID 7667714 is deleted successfully.
7667714 2005-06-10 11:59:49
A 16 FRAMEDEL
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
blktag=1
blkcount=1
blktotal=1
Information of deleted frame
---------------------
DID DEV FN SN
7667714 10.71.60.22 1 --
---------------------
;

Related Command
REG-RESCHGNOTIFY

14.2.6 Notifying Slot Confirmation

Usage Note
The resource change notification must be registered for the current user through the REG-
RESCHGNOTIFY command.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 200


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 14 Notification of Resource Changes

Response Format
It complies with the response format provided in 11.4 Format Description of the Resource
Change Notification.
<header>< auto id ><text block><terminator>
header::=<cr><lf><lf>^^^<DID>^<year>-<month>-<day>^<hour>:<minute>:<second>
<auto id>::=<cr><lf> A^^<atag>^<SLOTAFFIRM>
text block::=((<cr><lf>^^^<EN=error-code>) | (<cr><lf>^^^<quoted line>))
quotedline::=^^^<blktag=block-tag><cr><lf>^^^<blkcount=currentblock-
count><cr><lf>^^^<blktotal=total-count><cr><lf><result>
result::=<cr><lf><title><cr><lf>(<->*)<cr><lf>(<attribs>((<values>)*))(<-
>*)<cr><lf><cr><lf>
attribs::=<attrib>((^^<attrib>)*)<cr><lf>
values::=<value>((^^<value>)*)<cr><lf>
terminator::= <cr><lf>(;|>)
title="Information of added slot "
name of attributes: DID DEV FN SN

Output Parameter
Parameter Type Range Description

DID INTEGER - Indicates the device ID.

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the device name by default.


STRING When the value of configuration item
BMSNB_MSGNOTIFY_DEVME
AN is 1, the DEV parameter
indicates the IP address of the device.

FN INTEGER 0-255 Indicates the subrack ID.

SN INTEGER 0-35 Indicates the slot ID.

Error Code
None.

Example
If the reporting of TL1 NBI alarms is enabled (that is, the REG-RESCHGNOTIFY:::1::;
command is executed), the OSS system receives a resource change notification when the slot
11 of shelf 0 is added successfully.
7712779 2005-05-23 13:10:51
A 1539 SLOTAFFIRM
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
blktag=1
blkcount=1
blktotal=1
Information of added slot
---------------------
DID DEV FN SN
7712779 MA5600V3_10.71.60.53 0 11
---------------------
;

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 201


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 14 Notification of Resource Changes

Related Command
REG-RESCHGNOTIFY

14.2.7 Notifying the Slot Deletion


Usage Note
The resource change notification must be registered for the current user through the REG-
RESCHGNOTIFY command.

Supporting Device
For information about the supporting devices, see Table 24-1.

Response Format
It complies with the response format provided in 11.4 Format Description of the Resource
Change Notification.
title="Information of deleted slot "
name of attributes: DID DEV FN SN

Output Parameter
Parameter Type Range Description

DID INTEGER - Indicates the device ID.

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the device name by


STRING default. When the value of
configuration item
BMSNB_MSGNOTIFY_DEV
MEAN is 1, the DEV parameter
indicates the IP address of the
device.

FN INTEGER 0-255 Indicates the subrack ID.

SN INTEGER 0-35 Indicates the slot ID.

Error Code
None.

Example
If the reporting of TL1 NBI alarms is enabled (that is, the REG-RESCHGNOTIFY:::1::;
command is executed), the OSS system receives a resource change notification when the slot
1 in shelf 0 is deleted successfully.
7344129 2005-06-09 16:29:41
A 7 SLOTDEL
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 202


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 14 Notification of Resource Changes

blktag=1
blkcount=1
blktotal=1
Information of deleted slot
---------------------
DID DEV FN SN
7344129 10.71.56.151 0 1
---------------------
;

Related Command
REG-RESCHGNOTIFY

14.2.8 Reporting Notifications of OLT Attribute Changes


Usage Note
The notification of resource changes must have been registered for the current user through
the REG-RESCHGNOTIFY command.

Command Format
There is no command format. The U2000 automatically reports a notification to the OSS after
the name, alias or remark of an OLT is changed.

Supporting Device
Device Type No. Device Type

34 MA5680T

57 MA5606T

94 MA5603U

95 MA5603T

249 MA5600T

2331 MA5608T

2348 MA5683T

2346/2349/2352/2353 MA5800-X17/MA5800-X7/MA5800-X15/MA5800-X2

Input Parameter
There is no input parameter.

Response Format
This response format complies with that provided in 11.4 Format Description of the
Resource Change Notification.
<header>< auto id ><text block><terminator>
header::=<cr><lf><lf>^^^<DID>^<year>-<month>-<day>^<hour>:<minute>:<second>

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 203


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 14 Notification of Resource Changes

<auto id>::=<cr><lf> A^^<atag>^<OLTMODNOTIFY>


text block::=((<cr><lf>^^^<EN=error-code>) | (<cr><lf>^^^<quoted line>))
quotedline::=^^^<blktag=block-tag><cr><lf>^^^<blkcount=currentblock-
count><cr><lf>^^^<blktotal=total-count><cr><lf><result>
result::=<cr><lf><title><cr><lf>(<->*)<cr><lf>(<attribs>((<values>)*))(<-
>*)<cr><lf><cr><lf>
attribs::=<attrib>((^^<attrib>)*)<cr><lf>
values::=<value>((^^<value>)*)<cr><lf>
terminator::= <cr><lf>(;|>)
title="Information of modified device"
name of attributes: DID NAME ALIAS DLOC REMARK

Output Parameter
Parameter Type Range Description

DID INTEGER - Indicates the OLT ID.

NAME OCTET SIZE (128) Indicates the OLT name.


STRING

ALIAS OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the OLT alias.


STRING

DLOC OCTET SIZE (100) Indicates the OLT location.


STRING

REMARK OCTET SIZE (255) Indicates the OLT remark.


STRING

Error Code
None.

Example
If the reporting of TL1 NBI alarms is enabled (that is, the REG-RESCHGNOTIFY:::1::;
command is executed), and the alias of the OLT (ID: 7340034) is changed, the OSS system
receives a corresponding resource change notification as follows:

Command:

There is no command.

The result is as follows:


7340034 2011-02-16 16:27:03
A 1 OLTMODNOTIFY
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
blktag=1
blkcount=1
blktotal=1

Information of modified device


-----------------------------------------------
DID NAME ALIAS DLOC REMARK
7340034 -- 123_ -- --
-----------------------------------------------

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 204


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 14 Notification of Resource Changes

Related Command
REG-RESCHGNOTIFY

14.2.9 Reporting Notifications of MDU Attribute Changes

Usage Note
The notification of resource changes must have been registered for the current user through
the REG-RESCHGNOTIFY command.

Command Format
There is no command format. The U2000 automatically reports a notification to the OSS after
the name, alias, location or remark of an MDU is changed.

Supporting Device
Device Type No. Device Type

37 MA5662

61 MA5626E

62 MA5620E

64 MA5651

65 MA5620G

66 MA5626G

70 MA5610

92 MA5652G

96 MA5620

97 MA5626

100 MA5616

103 MA5635

104 MA5612

2312 MA5628

2321 MA5669

2320 MA5612A

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 205


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 14 Notification of Resource Changes

Input Parameter
There is no input parameter.

Response Format
This response format complies with that provided in 11.4 Format Description of the
Resource Change Notification.
<header>< auto id ><text block><terminator>
header::=<cr><lf><lf>^^^<DID>^<year>-<month>-<day>^<hour>:<minute>:<second>
<auto id>::=<cr><lf> A^^<atag>^<MXUMODNOTIFY>
text block::=((<cr><lf>^^^<EN=error-code>) | (<cr><lf>^^^<quoted line>))
quotedline::=^^^<blktag=block-tag><cr><lf>^^^<blkcount=currentblock-
count><cr><lf>^^^<blktotal=total-count><cr><lf><result>
result::=<cr><lf><title><cr><lf>(<->*)<cr><lf>(<attribs>((<values>)*))(<-
>*)<cr><lf><cr><lf>
attribs::=<attrib>((^^<attrib>)*)<cr><lf>
values::=<value>((^^<value>)*)<cr><lf>
terminator::= <cr><lf>(;|>)
title="Information of modifyed device"
name of attributes: DID NAME ALIAS DLOC REMARK

Output Parameter
Parameter Type Range Description

DID INTEGER - Indicates the MDU ID.

NAME OCTET SIZE (128) Indicates the MDU name.


STRING

ALIAS OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the MDU alias.


STRING

DLOC OCTET SIZE (100) Indicates the MDU location.


STRING

REMARK OCTET SIZE (255) Indicates the MDU remark.


STRING

Error Code
None.

Example
If the reporting of TL1 NBI alarms is enabled (that is, the REG-RESCHGNOTIFY:::1::;
command is executed), and the attributes of the MDU (ID: 7340038) are changed, the OSS
system receives a resource change notification.
Command:
None.
The result is as follows:
7340038 2011-02-18 14:35:05
A 1 MXUMODNOTIFY

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 206


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 14 Notification of Resource Changes

EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
blktag=1
blkcount=1
blktotal=1
Information of modified device
-------------------------------------------
DID NAME ALIAS DLOC REMARK
7340038 -- 123_ -- --
-------------------------------------------
;

Related Command
REG-RESCHGNOTIFY

14.2.10 Reporting Notifications of ONU Addition


Usage Note
l The OLT has discovered xPON boards and xPON ports.
l The notification of resource changes must have been registered for the current user
through the REG-RESCHGNOTIFY command.

Command Format
There is no command format.
FTTH ONU ports report notifications of ONU addition automatically. Therefore, you do not
need to run any command.

Supporting Device
Device Type No. Device Type

34 MA5680T

57 MA5606T

95 MA5603T

249 MA5600T

2331 MA5608T

2348 MA5683T

2346/2349/2352/2353 MA5800-X17/MA5800-X7/MA5800-X15/MA5800-X2

Input Parameter
There is no input parameter.

Response Format
This response format complies with that provided in 11.4 Format Description of the
Resource Change Notification.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 207


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 14 Notification of Resource Changes

Output Parameter
Parameter Type Range Description

DID INTEGER - Indicates the device ID.

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the device name by


STRING default. When the value of
configuration item
BMSNB_MSGNOTIFY_D
EVMEAN is 1, the DEV
parameter indicates the IP
address of the device.

FN INTEGER 0-255 Indicates the subrack ID.

SN INTEGER 0-35 Indicates the slot ID.

PN INTEGER 0-63 Indicates the port ID.

ONTID INTEGER 0-255 Indicates the ONU ID.


NOTE
If the UNI port is of
10G GPON or 10G
EPON, the value
range is 0-255; if
the UNI port is of
1G GPON or 1G
EPON, the value
range is 0-127.

Error Code
None.

Example
If the reporting of TL1 NBI alarms is enabled (that is, the REG-RESCHGNOTIFY:::1::;
command is executed), and ONU 13 connected to port 0/3/0 on the device named
10.144.79.135 is added, the system receives a resource change notification.
Command:
There is no command.
The result is as follows:
7340134 2010-11-24 15:32:54
A 1 ONUADDNOTIFY
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
blktag=1
blkcount=1
blktotal=1
Information of added onu
---------------------------------------------
DID DEV FN SN PN ONTID
7340134 10.144.79.135 0 3 0 13
---------------------------------------------
;

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 208


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 14 Notification of Resource Changes

Related Command
REG-RESCHGNOTIFY

14.2.11 Reporting Notifications of ONU Deletion


Usage Note
l The OLT must be online.
l The OLT must already discover xPON boards and xPON ports.
l The ONT information must have been added to the OLT correctly.
l The notification of resource changes must have been registered for the current user
through the REG-RESCHGNOTIFY command.

Command Format
There is no command format.
FTTH ONU ports report notifications of ONU deletion automatically. Therefore, you do not
need to run any command.

Supporting Device
Device Type No. Device Type

34 MA5680T

57 MA5606T

95 MA5603T

249 MA5600T

2331 MA5608T

2348 MA5683T

2346/2349/2352/2353 MA5800-X17/MA5800-X7/MA5800-X15/MA5800-X2

Input Parameter
There is no input parameter.

Response Format
This response format complies with that provided in 11.4 Format Description of the
Resource Change Notification.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 209


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 14 Notification of Resource Changes

Output Parameter
Parameter Type Range Description

DID INTEGER - Indicates the device ID.

DEV OCTET SIZE (192) Indicates the device name by


STRING default. When the value of
configuration item
BMSNB_MSGNOTIFY_D
EVMEAN is 1, the DEV
parameter indicates the IP
address of the device.

FN INTEGER 0-255 Indicates the subrack ID.

SN INTEGER 0-35 Indicates the slot ID.

PN INTEGER 0-63 Indicates the port ID.

ONTID INTEGER 0-255 Indicates the ONT ID.


NOTE
If the UNI port is of
10G GPON or 10G
EPON, the value
range is 0-255; if
the UNI port is of
1G GPON or 1G
EPON, the value
range is 0-127.

Error Code
None.

Example
If the reporting of TL1 NBI alarms is enabled (that is, the REG-RESCHGNOTIFY:::1::;
command is executed), and ONU 13 connected to port 0/3/0 on the device named
10.144.79.135 is deleted, the system receives a resource change notification.
Command:
There is no command.
The result is as follows:
7340134 2010-11-24 15:33:32
A 1 ONUDELNOTIFY
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
blktag=1
blkcount=1
blktotal=1

Information of deleted onu


--------------------------------
DID DEV FN SN PN ONTID
7340134 10.144.79.135 0 3 0 13

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 210


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 14 Notification of Resource Changes

--------------------------------
;

Related Command
REG-RESCHGNOTIFY

14.2.12 Reporting Notifications of Board Attribute Changes


Usage Note
The notification of resource changes must have been registered for the current user through
the REG-RESCHGNOTIFY command.

Command Format
There is no command format. The U2000 automatically reports a notification to the OSS after
the alias of a board is changed.

Supporting Device
Device Type No. Device Type

44 MA5600 V300

219 UA5000 (PVM)

253 UA5000(IPMB)

249 MA5600T

95 MA5603T

34 MA5680T

2331 MA5608T

2348 MA5683T

2346/2349/2352/2353 MA5800-X17/MA5800-X7/MA5800-X15/MA5800-X2

Input Parameter
There is no input parameter.

Response Format
This response format complies with that provided in 11.4 Format Description of the
Resource Change Notification.
<header>< auto id ><text block><terminator>
header::=<cr><lf><lf>^^^<DID>^<year>-<month>-<day>^<hour>:<minute>:<second>
<auto id>::=<cr><lf> A^^<atag>^<BOARDMODNOTIFY>
text block::=((<cr><lf>^^^<EN=error-code>) | (<cr><lf>^^^<quoted line>))
quotedline::=^^^<blktag=block-tag><cr><lf>^^^<blkcount=currentblock-
count><cr><lf>^^^<blktotal=total-count><cr><lf><result>

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 211


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 14 Notification of Resource Changes

result::=<cr><lf><title><cr><lf>(<->*)<cr><lf>(<attribs>((<values>)*))(<-
>*)<cr><lf><cr><lf>
attribs::=<attrib>((^^<attrib>)*)<cr><lf>
values::=<value>((^^<value>)*)<cr><lf>
terminator::= <cr><lf>(;|>)
title="Information of modified board"
name of attributes: DID FN SN ALIAS

Output Parameter
Parameter Type Range Description

DID INTEGER - Indicates the device ID.

FN INTEGER 0-255 Indicates the subrack ID.

SN INTEGER 0-35 Indicates the slot ID.

ALIAS OCTET SIZE (32) Indicates the new alias of the


STRING board.

Error Code
None.

Example
If the reporting of TL1 NBI alarms is enabled (that is, the REG-RESCHGNOTIFY:::1::;
command is executed), and the alias of the board on the device (ID: 7340034) is changed to
lwy123112323, the OSS system receives a resource change notification.

Command:

There is no command.

The result is as follows:

4294967295 2011-02-16 16:47:04


A 1 BOARDMODNOTIFY
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
blktag=1
blkcount=1
blktotal=1

Information of the modified board.


-----------------------
DID FN SN ALIAS
7340034 0 9 lwy123112323
-----------------------

Related Command
REG-RESCHGNOTIFY

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 212


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 14 Notification of Resource Changes

14.2.13 Notifying Plug and Play Deployment Completion

Usage Note
The resource change notification is registered for the current user by running the REG-
RESCHGNOTIFY command.

Command Format
None. When a certain ONU is deployed by using the plug and play (PnP) policy, the U2000
reports a PnP deployment completion notification to the OSS.

Supporting Device
All MDUs and ONTs.

Input Parameter
None

Response Format
It complies with the command output format provided in 11.4 Format Description of the
Resource Change Notification.
<header>< auto id ><text block><terminator>
header::=<cr><lf><lf>^^^<DID>^<year>-<month>-<day>^<hour>:<minute>:<second>
<auto id>::=<cr><lf> A^^<atag>^<PONFREEONUDEPLOYED>
text block::=((<cr><lf>^^^<EN=error-code>) | (<cr><lf>^^^<quoted line>))
quotedline::=^^^<blktag=block-tag><cr><lf>^^^<blkcount=currentblock-
count><cr><lf>^^^<blktotal=total-count><cr><lf><result>
result::=<cr><lf><title><cr><lf>(<->*)<cr><lf>(<attribs>((<values>)*))(<-
>*)<cr><lf><cr><lf>
attribs::=<attrib>((^^<attrib>)*)<cr><lf>
values::=<value>((^^<value>)*)<cr><lf>
terminator::= <cr><lf>(;|>)
title="Information of the free onu deployed."
name of attributes: OLTNAME OLTIP OLTID FRAME SLOT PORT ONUID MXUDID ONUNAME
ONUIP ONUTYPE VENDORID VERSION AUTHINFO

Output Parameter
Parameter Type Range Description

OLTNAME OCTET SIZE (128) Indicates the name of the OLT to


STRING which the ONU belongs.

OLTIP OCTET SIZE (128) Indicates the IP address of the OLT


STRING to which the ONU belongs.

OLTID INTEGER - Indicates the deviceID of the OLT


to which the ONU belongs.

FRAME INTEGER 0-255 Indicates the subrack ID of the OLT


to which the ONU belongs.

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 213


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 14 Notification of Resource Changes

Parameter Type Range Description

SLOT INTEGER 0-35 Indicates the slot ID of the OLT to


which the ONU belongs.

PORT INTEGER 0-63 Indicates the port ID of the OLT to


which the ONU belongs.

ONUID INTEGER 0-255 Indicates the ONU ID. Note: the


GE upstream port does not have an
ONU ID, this parameter is
displayed as -.

MXUDID INTEGER - Indicates the ID of the MxU


corresponding to the ONU. Note: If
the ONU is an ONT, this parameter
is displayed as -.

ONUNAME OCTET SIZE (255) Indicates the name of the ONU.


STRING

ONUIP OCTET SIZE (128) Indicates the IP address of the


STRING ONU.

ONUTYPE OCTET SIZE (128) Indicates the type of the ONU.


STRING

VENDORI OCTET SIZE (32) Indicates the vendor ID of the


D STRING ONU.

VERSION OCTET SIZE (128) Indicates the version of the ONU.


STRING

AUTHINFO OCTET SIZE (128) Indicates the authentication


STRING information of the ONU.

Error Code
None

Example
After the REG-RESCHGNOTIFY:::1::; command is run, the OSS receives a resource
change notification when a certain ONU is deployed by using the PnP policy.
l Command issued:
None
l Response message:
3145728 2014-08-08 14:05:39

3145728 2014-08-08 14:05:39


A 8 PONFREEONUDEPLOYED
EN=0 ENDESC=Succeeded.
blktag=1

Issue 01 (2017-01-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 214


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System
Northbound TL1 Interface User Guide 14 Notification of Resource Changes

blkcount=1
blktotal=1

Information of the free onu deployed.


------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------
OLTNAME OLTIP OLTID FRAME SLOT PORT ONUID MXUDID ONUNAME ONUIP ONUTYPE
VENDORID VERSION AUTHINFO
10.144.252.40 10.144.252.40 3145728 0 12 0 -- -- 10.144.252.210
10.144.252.210 MA5633 -- MA5633V800R315C00B533 60-DE-44-7E-0A-C3
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------

Related Command
REG-RESCHGNOTIFY

14.3 Notifying GPON Resource Changes


This topic provides the notifications and examples of GPON resource changes, including the
event that an FTTH GPON ONU port is online, automatic ONU d